Initial commit

22 files changed, 12161 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/README b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/README
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2d98ac590b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/README
@@ -0,0 +1,232 @@
+University of Wisconsin-Madison Thesis LaTeX Class
+
+by Eric Benedict, 2000, 2002
+
+This provides a class file which produces thesis, prelims,
+dissertations and project reports which should meet the
+requirements of the graduate school at UW-Madison.  In addition
+to the class file, an example thesis is included which provides
+a brief introduction to LaTeX and the usage of the style class
+in particular.  The usage is explained both by example through
+the source of the example thesis as well as in the typeset result
+of the example thesis.
+
+If you are new to LaTeX, I suggest making two copies of the example
+files.  Leave one as a reference and edit the other by removing the
+example text and replacing it with your own text.  This will make
+learning LaTeX and producing your thesis occur relatively quickly
+(at least it did for me.  I learned LaTeX and wrote my MS thesis
+in a couple of weeks doing this way).
+
+If you already know LaTeX, but want to learn more; this class file
+is relatively heavily commented and could serve as a basis for learing
+to write your own class files.
+
+Instructions for using:
+  1) Unpack the zip archive.  Done! (or you likely wouldn't be reading this!)
+  2) run latex on main.tex
+      UNIX/Linux: $ latex main <return>
+      Windows: depends on set up.  Likely: load main.tex and click LaTeX button
+                                   (assumes WinEdt/MikTex)
+  3) run bibtex to generate bibliography info:
+      UNIX/Linux: $ bibtex main <return>
+      Windows: depends on set up.  Likely: click BibTeX button.
+  4) run latex two more times (see above)
+  5) view dvi output
+      UNIX/Linux: $ xdvi main & (the '&' places the viewer in the background)
+      Windows: depends on set up.  Likely: click the viewer button.
+  6) printing
+       UNIX/Linux: $ dvips main    (straight to printer)
+                   $ dvips -o main.ps main (to file main.ps)
+       Windows: depends on setup...
+
+
+Good Luck!
+
+Eric
+
+
+
+File List:
+Name			Description
+withesis.cls		LaTeX2e thesis class file
+withesis.sty		LaTeX2.09 thesis class file (for those who hate change)
+				note: no longer maintained & not recommended!
+withe10.sty		10pt spacing info file (needed for 10pt thesis)
+withe12.sty		12pt spacing info file (needed for 12pt thesis)
+
+main.tex  		Thesis root file (run LaTeX on this file)
+prelude.tex		Thesis preliminary stuff (title page, TOC, etc)
+abstract.tex    	Thesis abstract 
+intro.tex        	A thesis chapter
+acro.tex        	A thesis chapter
+bibref.tex             	A thesis chapter
+bibs.tex            	A thesis chapter   
+code.tex       		A thesis chapter	
+essentials.tex        	A thesis chapter 
+figs.tex         	A thesis chapter
+math.tex          	A thesis chapter
+usage.tex          	A thesis chapter
+refs.bib   		The BibTeX reference library
+vwcontr.eps 		An encapsulated PostScript figure
+fig2.tex         	A figure using TeX's picture drawing language
+derivs.m  		A sample program listing
+
+essential.tex         	The original form of essentials.tex by Jon 
+                          Warbrick (c) 1989
+
+README			This file
+
+source.zip 		The zip archive you unpacked
+
+
+Acknowledgements:
+The {\tt withesis} style file is based on the Purdue thesis file
+written by Dave Kraynie and edited by Darrell McCauley.   Additional
+environments came from a thesis class file provided by the UW Math 
+Department.
+
+The idea and basis for the documenting example came from a similar
+manual James Darrell McCauley and Scott Hucker in 1993 for the Purdue 
+University thesis style file.
+
+The chapter on LaTeX essentials is an edited version of a document by
+Jon Warbrick.
+
+
+
+
+License:
+
+This class file is Licensed under the Perl Artistic License which is 
+reproduced below:
+
+Preamble
+
+The intent of this document is to state the conditions under which a Package
+may be copied, such that the Copyright Holder maintains some semblance of
+artistic control over the development of the package, while giving the users
+of the package the right to use and distribute the Package in a more-or-less
+customary fashion, plus the right to make reasonable modifications. 
+
+Definitions
+
+       "Package" refers to the collection of files distributed by the
+       Copyright Holder, and derivatives of that collection of files
+       created through textual modification. 
+
+       "Standard Version" refers to such a Package if it has not
+       been modified, or has been modified in accordance with the
+       wishes of the Copyright Holder as specified below. 
+
+       "Copyright Holder" is whoever is named in the copyright or
+       copyrights for the package. 
+
+       "You" is you, if you're thinking about copying or distributing
+       this Package. 
+
+       "Reasonable copying fee" is whatever you can justify on the
+       basis of media cost, duplication charges, time of people
+       involved, and so on. (You will not be required to justify it to
+       the Copyright Holder, but only to the computing community
+       at large as a market that must bear the fee.) 
+
+       "Freely Available" means that no fee is charged for the item
+       itself, though there may be fees involved in handling the
+       item. It also means that recipients of the item may
+       redistribute it under the same conditions they received it. 
+
+    1.You may make and give away verbatim copies of the source form of
+       the Standard Version of this Package without restriction, provided
+       that you duplicate all of the original copyright notices and associated
+       disclaimers. 
+
+    2.You may apply bug fixes, portability fixes and other modifications
+       derived from the Public Domain or from the Copyright Holder. A
+       Package modified in such a way shall still be considered the
+       Standard Version. 
+
+    3.You may otherwise modify your copy of this Package in any way,
+       provided that you insert a prominent notice in each changed file
+       stating how and when you changed that file, and provided that you do
+       at least ONE of the following: 
+
+           a.place your modifications in the Public Domain or otherwise
+              make them Freely Available, such as by posting said
+              modifications to Usenet or an equivalent medium, or placing
+              the modifications on a major archive site such as
+              uunet.uu.net, or by allowing the Copyright Holder to include
+              your modifications in the Standard Version of the Package. 
+           b.use the modified Package only within your corporation or
+              organization. 
+           c.rename any non-standard executables so the names do not
+              conflict with standard executables, which must also be
+              provided, and provide a separate manual page for each
+              non-standard executable that clearly documents how it
+              differs from the Standard Version. 
+           d.make other distribution arrangements with the Copyright
+              Holder. 
+
+    4.You may distribute the programs of this Package in object code or
+       executable form, provided that you do at least ONE of the following: 
+
+           a.distribute a Standard Version of the executables and library
+              files, together with instructions (in the manual page or
+              equivalent) on where to get the Standard Version. 
+           b.accompany the distribution with the machine-readable
+              source of the Package with your modifications. 
+           c.give non-standard executables non-standard names, and
+              clearly document the differences in manual pages (or
+              equivalent), together with instructions on where to get the
+              Standard Version. 
+           d.make other distribution arrangements with the Copyright
+              Holder. 
+
+    5.You may charge a reasonable copying fee for any distribution of this
+       Package. You may charge any fee you choose for support of this
+       Package. You may not charge a fee for this Package itself. However,
+       you may distribute this Package in aggregate with other (possibly
+       commercial) programs as part of a larger (possibly commercial)
+       software distribution provided that you do not advertise this Package
+       as a product of your own. You may embed this Package's interpreter
+       within an executable of yours (by linking); this shall be construed as
+       a mere form of aggregation, provided that the complete Standard
+       Version of the interpreter is so embedded. 
+
+    6.The scripts and library files supplied as input to or produced as
+       output from the programs of this Package do not automatically fall
+       under the copyright of this Package, but belong to whomever
+       generated them, and may be sold commercially, and may be
+       aggregated with this Package. If such scripts or library files are
+       aggregated with this Package via the so-called "undump" or
+       "unexec" methods of producing a binary executable image, then
+       distribution of such an image shall neither be construed as a
+       distribution of this Package nor shall it fall under the restrictions of
+       Paragraphs 3 and 4, provided that you do not represent such an
+       executable image as a Standard Version of this Package. 
+
+    7.C subroutines (or comparably compiled subroutines in other
+       languages) supplied by you and linked into this Package in order to
+       emulate subroutines and variables of the language defined by this
+       Package shall not be considered part of this Package, but are the
+       equivalent of input as in Paragraph 6, provided these subroutines do
+       not change the language in any way that would cause it to fail the
+       regression tests for the language. 
+
+    8.Aggregation of this Package with a commercial distribution is
+       always permitted provided that the use of this Package is embedded;
+       that is, when no overt attempt is made to make this Package's
+       interfaces visible to the end user of the commercial distribution.
+       Such use shall not be construed as a distribution of this Package. 
+
+    9.The name of the Copyright Holder may not be used to endorse or
+       promote products derived from this software without specific prior
+       written permission. 
+
+   10.THIS PACKAGE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND WITHOUT ANY
+       EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
+       WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+       MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+       PURPOSE. 
+
+                           The End
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/abstract.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/abstract.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9523f4d877
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/abstract.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+% abstract.tex
+%
+% This file has the abstract for the withesis style documentation
+%
+% Eric Benedict, Aug 2000
+%
+% It is provided without warranty on an AS IS basis.
+
+\noindent       % Don't indent this paragraph.
+This is not a thesis or dissertation and Master \TeX nician is not a
+degree granted at the University of Wisconsin-Madison.
+
+\vspace*{0.5em}
+\noindent       % Don't indent this paragraph.
+This explains the basics for using \LaTeX\ to typeset a dissertation,
+thesis or masters project or preliminary report for the University of 
+Wisconsin-Madison. Chapter
+1 talks briefly about the thesis formatting at UW-Madison.  Chapter 2 gives
+an overview of the ``essentials'' of \LaTeX{} and was written by Jon Warbrick.
+Chapter 3 talks about figures and tables and what a {\em float} is.  Chapter 4
+briefly introduces the {\sc Bib}\TeX{} program.  And finally, Chapter 5 discusses
+some of the details for using the {\tt withesis} style file.  The material in
+Chapters 2-4 basically are a review of fundamental \LaTeX{} usage and form
+a reasonable basic tutorial.
+
+\vspace*{0.5em}
+\noindent       % Don't indent this paragraph.
+The style discussed in this manual was originally written by Dave Kraynie and
+edited by James Darrell McCauley as the {\tt puthesis} style for Purdue
+University's theses.  This style was modified to form the {\tt withesis} style. This
+manual is largely based on a similar manual by James Darrell McCauley and Scott Hucker.
+Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation
+for any purpose and without fee is here by granted.  This software and its documentation
+is provided ``as is'' without any express or implied warranty.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/acro.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/acro.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..384c3d95c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/acro.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+% acrobat.tex
+%
+% This file explains how to generate Adobe Acrobat files
+%
+% Eric Benedict, July 2000
+%
+% It is provided without warranty on an AS IS basis.
+
+\newcommand{\pdf}{\mbox{\tt *.pdf}}
+
+\chapter{Adobe Acrobat (\pdf ) Files}
+The Adobe Acrobat file format has pretty much become the {\em de facto}
+standard for document sharing.  As such, some faculty members and/or
+departments may be requiring a final copy of the thesis in Acrobat format
+(\pdf ).
+
+There are several different methods of obtaining a \pdf\ file from a \LaTeX{}
+thesis; however, they are all very site specific.  A couple of different
+methods which have been found to work are mentioned as suggested ideas to try
+as a starting point.  Depending on what is installed at your site/location some
+of these may be applicable.
+
+\section{Converting from {\tt *.ps} to \pdf}
+One option to obtain the \pdf\ file would be to generate the thesis in a normal
+manner and then use the Acrobat\ {\tt Distiller}\ to convert the postscript file into a
+\pdf\ file.
+
+If the\ {\tt Distiller}\ program is available and convenient to use, then this is quite easy to do.
+
+Depending on the choice of document fonts, the results may not be satisfactory since
+some of the fonts may end up as bit-mapped fonts and will display poorly at any resolution
+other than what they were sampled on.  Also, since the\ {\tt Distiller}\ program is an expensive
+program to obtain, it is not always available.
+
+An alternative to the Adobe\ {\tt Distiller}\ program is the Alladin\ {\tt Ghostscript}\ program.  This is
+available for free from
+
+{\tt \verb|   http://www.cs.wisc.edu/~ghost/index.html|}
+
+This program is available for most common operating systems as a compiled binary, but the source code
+is available for other systems.  One drawback is that this conversion must be performed as a
+command line invocation and isn't very user friendly.  This may be addressed in a future version of\
+{\tt Ghostview}, the program which provides a nice user interface to\ {\tt Ghostscript}.
+
+\section{Converting from {\tt *.dvi} to \pdf}
+There are two programs available which will convert from {\tt *.dvi} to \pdf,\ {\tt dvipdf}\ and\
+{\tt dvipdfm}.  The\ {\tt dvipdfm}\ program  will be discussed here.  In version 0.12, it can generate
+bookmarks, thumbnails (with assistance from\ {\tt Ghostscript}), scaling and rotation, JPEG and
+PNG bitmaps and font encoding and re-encoding (to support fonts which aren't fully supported by
+the Acrobat suite).  When\ {\tt Ghostscript}\ is properly installed,\ {\tt dvipdfm}\ will automatically
+convert any encapsulated PostScript figures into the required \pdf{} format.  This program behaved in a
+similar manner to the {\tt dvips} program and was used to produce the \pdf{} format of this document.
+
+
+
+\section{Generating \pdf{} Initially}
+There are now some programs which are similar to \TeX{} but instead of producing a\ {\tt .dvi}\ output,
+they produce \pdf as a native output.  One such program, {\sc pdf}\TeX{} / {\sc pdf}\LaTeX{},
+is available from
+
+{\tt \verb|   http://www.tug.org/applications/pdftex|}
+
+Note that as of this date, July 2000, {\sc pdf}\TeX{} / {\sc pdf}\LaTeX{} while currently quite usable, it
+is still in a beta version.  Look at the web site for more current information.
+
+The present version was able to produce a \pdf{} file of this document without any required
+changes, except for the Postscript figure inclusion  (Figure~\ref{vwcontr}).  To properly include
+this figure, requires the conversion of the postscript figure into a \pdf{} figure.  The procedure
+is described in the manual for {\sc pdf}\TeX{} / {\sc pdf}\LaTeX{}.  Note that the figure conversion will
+require either\ {\tt Distiller}\ or\ {\tt Ghostscript}.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/bibref.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/bibref.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..62fb4d901c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/bibref.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+\chapter{Bib\TeX\ Entries}

+\label{bibrefs}

+The following shows the fields required in all types of Bib\TeX\ entries.

+Fields with {\tt OPT} prefixed are optional (the three letters {\tt OPT} should 

+not be used).  If an optional field is not used, then the entire field can be deleted.

+

+{\tt

+\singlespace

+\begin{verbatim}

+

+@Unpublished{,                            @Manual{,

+  author =      "",                         title =           "",

+  title =       "",                         OPTauthor =       "",

+  note =        "",                         OPTorganization = "",

+  OPTyear =     "",                         OPTaddress =      "",

+  OPTmonth =    ""                          OPTedition =      "",

+}                                           OPTyear =         "",

+                                            OPTmonth =        "",

+@TechReport{,                               OPTnote =         "" 

+  author =      "",                       }

+  title =       "",

+  institution = "",                       @InProceedings{,

+  year =        "",                         author =          "",

+  OPTtype =     "",                         title =           "",

+  OPTnumber =   "",                         booktitle =       "",

+  OPTaddress =  "",                         year =            "",

+  OPTmonth =    "",                         OPTeditor =       "",

+  OPTnote =     ""                          OPTpages =        "",

+}                                           OPTorganization = "",

+                                            OPTpublisher =    "",

+@Proceedings{,                              OPTaddress =      "",

+  title =           "",                     OPTmonth =        "",

+  year =            "",                     OPTnote =         "" 

+  OPTeditor =       "",                   }

+  OPTpublisher =    "",

+  OPTorganization = "",

+  OPTaddress =      "",

+  OPTmonth =        "",

+  OPTnote =         "" 

+}

+

+

+

+@PhDThesis{,                              @InCollection{,

+  author =      "",                         author =          "",

+  title =       "",                         title =           "",

+  school =      "",                         booktitle =       "",

+  year =        "",                         publisher =       "",

+  OPTaddress =  "",                         year =            "",

+  OPTmonth =    "",                         OPTeditor =       "",

+  OPTnote =     ""                          OPTchapter =      "",

+}                                           OPTpages =        "",

+                                            OPTaddress =      "",

+                                            OPTmonth =        "",

+                                            OPTnote =         ""

+                                          }

+

+ 

+@Misc{,                                   @InCollection{,

+  OPTauthor =       "",                     author =          "",

+  OPTtitle =        "",                     title =           "",

+  OPThowpublished = "",                     chapter =         "",

+  OPTyear =         "",                     publisher =       "",

+  OPTmonth =        "",                     year =            "",

+  OPTnote =         ""                      OPTeditor =       "",

+}                                           OPTpages =        "",

+}                                           OPTvolume =       "",

+                                            OPTseries =       "",

+                                            OPTaddress =      "",

+                                            OPTedition =      "",

+                                            OPTmonth =        "",

+                                            OPTnote =         ""

+                                          }

+

+@MastersThesis{,                          @Article{,

+  author =      "",                         author =          "",

+  title =       "",                         title =           "",

+  school =      "",                         journal =         "",

+  year =        "",                         year =            "",

+  OPTaddress =  "",                         OPTvolume =       "",

+  OPTmonth =    "",                         OPTnumber =       "",

+  OPTnote =     ""                          OPTpages =        "",

+}                                           OPTmonth =        "",

+                                            OPTnote =         ""

+                                           }\end{verbatim} }

diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/bibs.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/bibs.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5fd197ae13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/bibs.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+% bibs.tex
+%
+% This chapter briefly talks about BibTex and is mostly
+% copied from a similar chapter from "How to TeX a Thesis:
+% The Purdue Thesis Styles" by James Darrell McCauley and
+% Scott Hucker
+%
+
+\newcommand{\BibTeX}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+
+\chapter{Citations and Bibliographies}
+This chapter is an edited form of the same chapter from {\em How to 
+\TeX{} a Thesis: The Purdue Thesis Styles} by James Darrell McCauley and
+Scott Hucker.
+
+The task of compiling and formatting the sources cited in papers can
+be quite tedious, especially for large documents like theses.  A program
+separate from \LaTeX{}, called ``\BibTeX{},''can be used to automate this task~\cite{lamport}.
+
+\section{The Citation Command}
+When referring to the work of someone else, the {\tt \verb|\cite|} command is used.
+This generates the citation in the text for you.  In the above paragraph, the command
+{\tt \verb|\cite{lamport}|} was used after the word ``task.''  The formatting of your
+citation is handled by either the document style or a style option.  The default citation
+style uses the number system (a number in square brackets).  Other citation styles
+may use the author-date system, (Lamport, 1986) or the superscript$^3$ system.
+
+\section{Bibliography Styles}
+The way that a reference is formatted in your bibliography depends on the bibliography
+style, which is specified near the beginning of your document with the\break
+{\tt \verb|\bibliographstyle{file}|} command.  The file {\tt file.bst} is the name of the 
+bibliography style file.  Standard \BibTeX{} bibliography style files include {\tt plain},
+{\tt unsrt}, {\tt alpha}, and {\tt abbrev}.  The bibliography style governs whether or not
+references are sorted, whether first names or initials are used for authors, whether or 
+not last names are listed first, the location of the year in the references (after the
+author or at the end of the reference), {\em etc.}.  You may be required by your
+department or major professor to follow as style for a particular journal.  If so, then you
+will need to find a \BibTeX{} style file to suit your needs.  Most major journals have
+style files.  If you cannot locate an appropriate \BibTeX{} style file, then choose the
+one which is closest and then edit the {\tt .bbl} file by hand.  See Section~\ref{BBL}
+for a brief discussion on the {\tt .bbl} file.  Some common, but non-standard \BibTeX{}
+styles include
+\begin{tabbing}
+{\tt jacs-new.bstxxxx}\= {\em Journal of the American Chemical Society}\kill
+{\tt acm.bst}\>The Association for Computing Machinery\\
+{\tt ieeetr.bst}\> The {\em IEEE Transactions} style\\
+{\tt jacs-new.bst}\> {\em Journal of the American Chemical Society}
+\end{tabbing}
+
+\section{The Database}
+The  {\tt \verb|\bibliography{file}|} command is placed in your input file at the location
+where the ``List of References'' section\footnote{or ``Bibliography'' 
+if {\tt \char92 altbibtitle } has been specified in the preamble.} would be.  It specifies the name (or names) of
+your bibliographic data base, {\tt file.bib}.  An example entry in a \BibTeX{}
+database is:
+\begin{quote}\singlespace\tt\begin{verbatim}
+@book{ lamport86 ,
+     author =    "Leslie Lamport" ,
+     title =     "\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System" ,
+     publisher = "Addison--Wesley Pub.\ Co." ,
+     year =      "1986" ,
+     address =   "Reading, MA" 
+}
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+
+The citation key is the first field in this entry--- citing this book in a \LaTeX{}
+file would look like
+\begin{quote}\singlespace\tt\begin{verbatim}
+According to Lamport~\cite{lamport86} ...
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+The tilde ({\tt \verb|~|}) is used to tie the word ``Lamport'' to the citation
+generated.  The space between these words is then unbreakable---the word ``Lamport''
+and the citation \cite{lamport} will not be split across two lines if they happen to occur
+near the end of a line.
+
+A listing of all entry types with their required and optional fields is given in 
+Appendix~\ref{bibrefs}. There are several tools which exist to help in editing a \BibTeX{}
+file, however, their use is beyond the scope of this manual and can be found by searching
+the net.  You can simply use a plain text editor like {\tt vi} or {\tt WordPad} to edit
+and create the database files.
+
+There are several rules which you must follow when creating your database.  Authors are
+always listed by their full names, first name first, and multiple authors are separated
+by {\tt and}.  For example
+\begin{quote}\singlespace\tt\begin{verbatim}
+author = "John Jay Park and Frederick Gene Watson and
+          Michelle Catherine Smith",
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+If you were using {\tt abbrv} as your {\tt bibliographystyle}, a reference for these
+authors may look like:
+\begin{quote}
+J.J. Park, F.G. Watson, and M.C. Smith \ldots
+\end{quote}
+
+Some styles only capitalize the first word of the title.  If you use any acronyms or
+other words that should always be capitalized in titles, then they should be 
+enclosed in {\tt \{\}}'s ({\em e.g.}, {\tt \{Fortran\}}, {\tt \{N\}ewton}).
+This protects the case of these characters.
+
+There are several other rules for \BibTeX{} listed in~\cite{lamport} which should be
+referred to because they are not discussed here.
+
+\section{Putting It All Together}
+\label{BBL}
+To aid the reader in understanding how all of this works together, the following 
+excerpt was taken from Lamport~\cite{lamport}:
+\begin{quotation}\singlespace
+When you ran \LaTeX{} with the input file {\tt sample.tex}, you may have
+noticed that \LaTeX{} created a file named {\tt sample.aux}.  This file,
+called an {\em auxiliary} file, contains cross-referencing information.  Since
+{\tt sample.tex} contains no cross-referencing commands, the auxiliary file it
+produces has no information.  However, suppose that \LaTeX{} is run with an
+input file named {\tt myfile.tex} that has citations and bibliography-making
+[or referencing] commands.  The auxiliary file {\tt myfile.aux} that it produces
+will contain all of the citation keys and the arguments of the {\tt \verb|\bibliography|}
+and {\tt\verb|\bibliographystyle|} commands.  When \BibTeX{} is run, it reads
+this information from the auxiliary file and produces a file named {\tt myfile.bbl}
+containing \LaTeX{} commands to produce the source list \ldots The next time
+\LaTeX{} is run on {\tt myfile.tex}, the {\tt \verb|\bibliography|} command reads
+the {\tt bbl} file ({\tt myfile.bbl}), which generates the source list.
+\end{quotation}
+
+Thus, the command sequence for a source file called {\tt main.tex} which is going to
+use \BibTeX{} would be:
+\begin{quote}\singlespace\tt\begin{verbatim}
+latex main.tex
+bibtex main
+latex main
+latex main
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+The first \LaTeX{} is to collect all of the citations for \BibTeX{}.  Then
+\BibTeX{} is run to generate the bibliography.  \LaTeX{} is run again to
+incorporate the bibliography into the document and the run the last time to
+update any references (like pages in the Table of Contents) which changed when
+the bibliography was included.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/code.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/code.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a7a6d7211c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/code.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+% code.tex
+% this file is part of the example UW-Madison Thesis document
+% It demonstrates one method for incorporating program listings
+% into a document.
+
+\chapter{Matlab Code} \label{matlab}
+This is an example of a Matlab m-file.
+\verbatimfile{derivs.m}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/derivs.m b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/derivs.m
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c723cdbbe4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/derivs.m
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+function dPsi = derivs(t,Psi); 
+% derivs computes the state derivatives for an induction machine 
+% The machine is in the synchronous reference frame. 
+% Eric Benedict, Spring 1996 
+ 
+% Machine parameters... 
+global Rs Rqr Rdr Xls Xlr Xm Xms J P We Wb Vs 
+ 
+% rename state vector... 
+Phqs=Psi(1); 
+Phds=Psi(2); 
+Phqr=Psi(3); 
+Phdr=Psi(4); 
+Wr=Psi(5); 
+Theta=Psi(6); 
+ 
+ 
+% Select Reference Frame... 
+% Assume no angle differnce between a-axis and q-axis at t=0 
+
+% Synchronous
+W=We; 
+ThetaR=W*t; 
+  
+% Compute Machine Currents... 
+Phmq=Xms*Phqs/Xls + Xms*Phqr/Xlr; 
+Phmd=Xms*Phds/Xls + Xms*Phdr/Xlr; 
+ 
+Iqs=(Phqs - Phmq)/Xls; 
+Ids=(Phds - Phmd)/Xls; 
+Iqr=(Phqr - Phmq)/Xlr; 
+                                    Idr=(Phdr - Phmd)/Xlr; 
+ 
+ 
+% Compute Torques... 
+Te=3*P*(Phds*Iqs-Phqs*Ids)/(4*Wb);    %  Electrical Torque 
+Tl=0;                                 %  Load Torque 
+  
+ 
+% Compute Voltages... 
+Vqs=Vs*cos(We*t - ThetaR); 
+Vds=-1*Vs*sin(We*t - ThetaR); 
+Vqr=0; 
+Vdr=0; 
+  
+% Compute new derivative of state vector... 
+dPsi(1) = Vqs - Rs*(Phqs - Phmq)/Xls - W*Phds/Wb;          % PHqs/Wb 
+dPsi(2) = Vds - Rs*(Phds - Phmd)/Xls + W*Phqs/Wb;          % PHds/Wb 
+dPsi(3) = Vqr - Rqr*(Phqr - Phmq)/Xlr - (W-Wr)*Phdr/Wb;    % PHqr/Wb 
+dPsi(4) = Vdr - Rdr*(Phdr - Phmd)/Xlr + (W-Wr)*Phqr/Wb;    % PHdr/Wb 
+ 
+dPsi(5) = (Te - Tl)*P/(2*J*Wb);           % Wr/Wb 
+ 
+dPsi(6) = Wr/Wb;                          % Theta/Wb 
+
+dPsi=Wb*dPsi; 
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/essential.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/essential.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d048f3e730
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/essential.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,995 @@
+% Essential LaTeX - Jon Warbrick 02/88


+


+% Copyright (C) Jon Warbrick and Plymouth Polytechnic 1989


+% Permission is granted to reproduce the document in any way providing


+% that it is distributed for free, except for any reasonable charges for


+% printing, distribution, staff time, etc.  Direct commercial


+% exploitation is not permitted.  Extracts may be made from this


+% document providing an acknolwledgment of the original source is


+% maintained.


+


+\documentstyle[11pt,hndout]{article}


+


+% counters used for the sample file example


+


+\newcounter{savesection}


+\newcounter{savesubsection}


+


+% commands to do 'LaTeX Manual-like' examples


+


+\newlength{\egwidth}\setlength{\egwidth}{0.42\textwidth}


+


+\newenvironment{eg}{\begin{list}{}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{0.05\textwidth}\setlength{\rightmargin}{\leftmargin}}\item[]\footnotesize}{\end{list}}


+


+\newenvironment{egbox}{\begin{minipage}[t]{\egwidth}}{\end{minipage}}


+


+\newcommand{\egstart}{\begin{eg}\begin{egbox}}


+\newcommand{\egmid}{\end{egbox}\hfill\begin{egbox}}


+\newcommand{\egend}{\end{egbox}\end{eg}}


+


+% one or two other commands


+


+\newcommand{\fn}[1]{\hbox{\tt #1}}


+\newcommand{\llo}[1]{(see line #1)}


+\newcommand{\lls}[1]{(see lines #1)}


+\newcommand{\bs}{$\backslash$}


+


+\title{Essential \LaTeX}


+\author{Jon Warbrick}


+\docnumber{U05.04--202}


+


+\begin{document}


+


+\maketitle


+


+\section{Introduction}


+


+This document is an attempt to give you all the essential


+information that you will need in order to use the \LaTeX{} Document


+Preparation System.  Only very basic features are covered, and a


+vast amount of detail has been omitted.  In a document of this size


+it is not possible to include everything that you might need to know,


+and if you intend to make extensive use of the program you should


+refer to a more complete reference.  Attempting to produce complex


+documents using only the information found below will require


+much more work than it should, and will probably produce a less


+than satisfactory result.


+


+The main reference for \LaTeX{} is {\em The \LaTeX{} User's guide and


+Reference Manual\/} by Leslie Lamport (M05.04--200).  This contains


+all the information that you will ever need to know about the program,


+and you will need access to a copy if you are to use \LaTeX{}


+seriously.


+


+Both the Manual and this document avoid mentioning anything that


+depends on the particular computer system that you are using.  This is


+because \LaTeX{} is available on a number of systems and they all


+differ in one way or another.  Instead, they both refer to a {\em local


+guide\/} for their particular system.  For \LaTeX{} on the Prime, the


+{\em local guide\/} is the handout {\em The Local Guide to \LaTeX{} on


+the Plymouth Prime System\/} (U05.04--201).


+


+\section{How does \LaTeX{} work?}


+


+In order to use \LaTeX{} you generate a file containing


+both the text that you wish to print and instructions to tell \LaTeX{}


+how you want it to appear.  You will normally create


+this file using your system's text editor.  You can give the file any name you


+like, but it should end ``\fn{.TEX}'' to identify the file's contents.


+You then get \LaTeX{} to process the file, and it creates a


+new file of typesetting commands; this has the same name as your file but


+the ``\fn{.TEX}'' ending is replaced by ``\fn{.DVI}''.  This stands for


+`{\it D\/}e{\it v\/}ice {\it I\/}ndependent' and, as the name implies, this file


+can be used to create output on a range of printing devices.


+Your {\em local guide\/} will go into more detail.


+


+Rather than encourage you to dictate exactly how your document


+should be laid out, \LaTeX{} instructions allow you describe its


+{\em logical structure\/}.  For example, you can think of a quotation


+embedded within your text as an element of this logical structure: you would


+normally expect a quotation to be displayed in a recognisable style to set it


+off from the rest of the text.


+A human typesetter would recognise the quotation and handle


+it accordingly, but since \LaTeX{} is only a computer program it requires


+your help.  There are therefore \LaTeX{} commands that allow you to


+identify quotations and as a result allow \LaTeX{} to typeset them correctly.


+


+Fundamental to \LaTeX{} is the idea of a {\em document style\/} that


+determines exactly how a document will be formatted.  \LaTeX{} provides


+standard document styles that describe how standard logical structures


+(such as quotations) should be formatted.  You may have to supplement


+these styles by specifying the formatting of logical structures


+peculiar to your document, such as mathematical formulae.  You can


+also modify the standard document styles or even create an entirely


+new one, though you should know the basic principles of typographical


+design before creating a radically new style.


+


+There are a number of good reasons for concentrating on the logical


+structure rather than on the appearance of a document.  It prevents


+you from making elementary typographical errors in the mistaken


+idea that they improve the aesthetics of a document---you should


+remember that the primary function of document design is to make


+documents easier to read, not prettier.  It is more flexible, since


+you only need to alter the definition of the quotation style


+to change the appearance of all the quotations in a document.  Most


+important of all, logical design encourages better writing.


+A visual system makes it easier to create visual effects rather than


+a coherent structure; logical design encourages you to concentrate on


+your writing and makes it harder to use formatting as a substitute


+for good writing.


+


+\section{A Sample \LaTeX{} file}


+


+\begin{figure} %---------------------------------------------------------------


+{\footnotesize\begin{verbatim}


+ 1: % SMALL.TEX -- Released 5 July 1985


+ 2: % USE THIS FILE AS A MODEL FOR MAKING YOUR OWN LaTeX INPUT FILE.


+ 3: % EVERYTHING TO THE RIGHT OF A  %  IS A REMARK TO YOU AND IS IGNORED


+ 4: % BY LaTeX.


+ 5: %


+ 6: % WARNING!  DO NOT TYPE ANY OF THE FOLLOWING 10 CHARACTERS EXCEPT AS


+ 7: % DIRECTED:        &   $   #   %   _   {   }   ^   ~   \


+ 8:


+ 9: \documentstyle[11pt,a4]{article}  % YOUR INPUT FILE MUST CONTAIN THESE


+10: \begin{document}                  % TWO LINES PLUS THE \end COMMAND AT


+11:                                   % THE END


+12:


+13: \section{Simple Text}          % THIS COMMAND MAKES A SECTION TITLE.


+14:


+15: Words are separated by one or    more      spaces.  Paragraphs are


+16:     separated by one or more blank lines.  The output is not affected


+17: by adding extra spaces or extra blank lines to the input file.


+18:


+19:


+20: Double quotes are typed like this: ``quoted text''.


+21: Single quotes are typed like this: `single-quoted text'.


+22:


+23: Long dashes are typed as three dash characters---like this.


+24:


+25: Italic text is typed like this: {\em this is italic text}.


+26: Bold   text is typed like this: {\bf this is  bold  text}.


+27:


+28: \subsection{A Warning or Two}        % THIS MAKES A SUBSECTION TITLE.


+29:


+30: If you get too much space after a mid-sentence period---abbreviations


+31: like etc.\ are the common culprits)---then type a backslash followed by


+32: a space after the period, as in this sentence.


+33:


+34: Remember, don't type the 10 special characters (such as dollar sign and


+35: backslash) except as directed!  The following seven are printed by


+36: typing a backslash in front of them:  \$  \&  \#  \%  \_  \{  and  \}.


+37: The manual tells how to make other symbols.


+38:


+39: \end{document}                    % THE INPUT FILE ENDS LIKE THIS


+\end{verbatim}  }


+


+\caption{A Sample \LaTeX{} File}\label{fig:sample}


+


+\end{figure} %-----------------------------------------------------------------


+


+\begin{figure} %---------------------------------------------------------------


+


+% This figure will only work if the main style of this document


+% is article, or something like article, because that's what the example


+% file thinks it is.  Unfortunately, I can't see how to include a


+% \documentstyle command in a figure!


+


+\setcounter{savesection}{\value{section}}


+\setcounter{section}{0}


+\setcounter{savesubsection}{\value{subsection}}


+\setcounter{subsection}{0}


+


+\setlength{\parindent}{17pt}


+\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}


+


+\noindent\rule{\textwidth}{0.8pt}


+


+% SMALL.TEX -- Released 5 July 1985


+% USE THIS FILE AS A MODEL FOR MAKING YOUR OWN LaTeX INPUT FILE.


+% EVERYTHING TO THE RIGHT OF A  %  IS A REMARK TO YOU AND IS IGNORED


+% BY LaTeX.


+%


+% WARNING!  DO NOT TYPE ANY OF THE FOLLOWING 10 CHARACTERS EXCEPT AS


+% DIRECTED:        &   $   #   %   _   {   }   ^   ~   \


+


+% .........................................................................


+% \documentstyle[a4]{article}    % YOUR INPUT FILE MUST CONTAIN THESE


+% \begin{document}               % TWO LINES PLUS THE \end COMMAND AT


+%                                % THE END


+% .........................................................................


+


+\section{Simple Text}          % THIS COMMAND MAKES A SECTION TITLE.


+


+Words are separated by one or    more      spaces.  Paragraphs are


+    separated by one or more blank lines.  The output is not affected


+by adding extra spaces or extra blank lines to the input file.


+


+


+Double quotes are typed like this: ``quoted text''.


+Single quotes are typed like this: `single-quoted text'.


+


+Long dashes are typed as three dash characters---like this.


+


+Italic text is typed like this: {\em this is italic text}.


+Bold   text is typed like this: {\bf this is  bold  text}.


+


+\subsection{A Warning or Two}        % THIS MAKES A SUBSECTION TITLE.


+


+If you get too much space after a mid-sentence period---abbreviations


+like etc.\ are the common culprits)---then type a backslash followed by


+a space after the period, as in this sentence.


+


+Remember, don't type the 10 special characters (such as dollar sign and


+backslash) except as directed!  The following seven are printed by


+typing a backslash in front of them:  \$  \&  \#  \%  \_  \{  and  \}.


+The manual tells how to make other symbols.


+


+% ................


+% \end{document}


+% ................


+


+\noindent\rule{\textwidth}{0.8pt}


+


+\setcounter{section}{\value{savesection}}


+\setcounter{subsection}{\value{savesubsection}}


+


+\caption{The result of processing the sample file}\label{fig:result}


+


+\end{figure} % ----------------------------------------------------------------


+


+Have a look at the example \LaTeX{} file in Figure~\ref{fig:sample}.  It


+is a slightly modified copy of the standard \LaTeX{} example file


+\fn{SMALL.TEX}.  Your local guide will tell you how you can make


+your own copy of this file.  The line numbers down the left-hand side


+are not part of the file, but have been added to make it easier to


+identify various portions. Also have a look at Figure~\ref{fig:result} which


+shows, more or less, the result of processing this file.


+


+\subsection{Running Text}


+


+Most documents consist almost entirely of running text---words formed


+into sentences, which are in turn formed into paragraphs---and the example file


+is no exception. Describing running text poses no problems, you just type


+it in naturally. In the output that it produces, \LaTeX{} will fill


+lines and adjust the


+spacing between words to give tidy left and right margins.


+The spacing and distribution of the words in your input


+file will have no effect at all on the eventual output.


+Any number of spaces in your input file


+are treated as a single space by \LaTeX{}, it also regards the


+end of each line as a space between words \lls{15--17}.


+A new paragraph is


+indicated by a blank line in your input file, so don't leave


+any blank lines unless you really wish to start a paragraph.


+


+\LaTeX{} reserves a number of the less common keyboard characters for its


+own use. The ten characters


+\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}


+#  $  %  &  ~  _  ^  \  {  }


+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}


+should not appear as part of your text, because if they do


+\LaTeX{} will get confused.


+


+\subsection{\LaTeX{} Commands}


+


+There are a number of words in the file that start `\verb|\|' \lls{9, 10 and


+13}.  These are \LaTeX{} {\em commands\/} and they describe the structure


+of your document.


+There are a number of things that you should realise about these commands:


+\begin{itemize}


+


+\item All \LaTeX{} commands consist of a `\verb|\|' followed by one or more


+characters.


+


+\item \LaTeX{} commands should be typed using the correct mixture of upper- and


+lower-case letters.  \verb|\BEGIN| is {\em not\/} the same as \verb|\begin|.


+


+\item Some commands are placed within your text.  These are used to


+switch things, like different typestyles, on and off. The \verb|\em| command


+is used like this to emphasise text, normally by changing to an {\it italic\/}


+typestyle \llo{25}.  The command and the text are always enclosed between


+`\verb|{|' and `\verb|}|'---the `\verb|{\em|' turns the effect on and and the


+`\verb|}|' turns it off.


+


+\item There are other commands that look like


+\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}


+\command{text}


+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}


+In this case the text is called the ``argument'' of the command.  The


+\verb|\section| command is like this \llo{13}.


+Sometimes you have to use curly brackets `\verb|{}|' to enclose the argument,


+sometimes square brackets `\verb|[]|', and sometimes both at once.


+There is method behind this apparent madness, but for the


+time being you should be sure to copy the commands exactly as given.


+


+\item When a command's name is made up entirely of letters, you must make sure


+that the end of the command is marked by something that isn't a letter.


+This is usually either the opening bracket around the command's argument, or


+it's a space.  When it's a space, that space is always ignored by \LaTeX. We


+will see later that this can sometimes be a problem.


+


+\end{itemize}


+


+\subsection{Overall structure}


+


+There are some \LaTeX{} commands that must appear in every document.


+The actual text of the document always starts with a


+\verb|\begin{document}| command and ends with an \verb|\end{document}|


+command \lls{10 and 39}.  Anything that comes after the


+\verb|\end{document}| command is ignored.  Everything that comes


+before the \verb|\begin{document}| command is called the


+{\em preamble\/}. The preamble can only contain \LaTeX{} commands


+to describe the document's style.


+


+One command that must appear in the preamble is the


+\verb|\documentstyle| command \llo{9}.  This command specifies


+the overall style for the document.  Our example file is a simple


+technical document, and uses the {\tt article\/} style, modified to


+print in eleven-point type on A4 paper.


+There are other styles that you can use, as you will


+find out later on in this document.


+


+\subsection{Other Things to Look At}


+


+\LaTeX{} can print both opening and closing quote characters, and can manage


+either of these either single or double.  To do this it uses the two quote


+characters from your keyboard: {\tt `} and {\tt '}. You will probably think of


+{\tt '} as the ordinary single quote character which probably looks like


+{\tt\symbol{'23}} or {\tt\symbol{'15}} on your keyboard,


+and {\tt `} as a ``funny''


+character that probably appears as {\tt\symbol{'22}}.


+You type these characters once for single quote \llo{21},  and twice for


+double quotes \llo{20}. The double quote character {\tt "} itself


+is almost never used.


+


+\LaTeX{} can produce three different kinds of dashes.


+A long dash, for use as a punctuation symbol, as is typed as three dash


+characters in a row, like this `\verb|---|' \llo{23}.  A shorter dash,


+used between numbers as in `10--20', is typed as two dash


+characters in a row, while a single dash character is used as a hyphen.


+


+From time to time you will need to include one or more of the \LaTeX{}


+special symbols in your text.  Seven of them can be printed by


+making them into commands by proceeding them by backslash


+\llo{36}.  The remaining three symbols can be produced by more


+advanced commands, as can symbols that do not appear on your keyboard


+such as \dag, \ddag, \S, \pounds, \copyright, $\sharp$ and $\clubsuit$.


+


+It is sometimes useful to include comments in a \LaTeX{} file, to remind


+you of what you have done or why you did it.  Everything to the


+right of a \verb|%| sign is ignored by \LaTeX{}, and so it can


+be used to introduce a comment.


+


+\section{Document Styles and Style Options}\label{sec:styles}


+


+There are four standard document styles available in \LaTeX:


+\nobreak


+\begin{description}


+


+\item[{\tt article}]  intended for short documents and articles for publication.


+Articles do not have chapters, and when \verb|\maketitle| is used to generate


+a title (see Section~\ref{sec:title}) it appears at the top of the first page


+rather than on a page of its own.


+


+\item[{\tt report}] intended for longer technical documents.


+It is similar to


+{\tt article}, except that it contains chapters and the title appears on a page


+of its own.


+


+\item[{\tt book}] intended as a basis for book publication.  Page layout is


+adjusted assuming that the output will eventually be used to print on


+both sides of the paper.


+


+\item[{\tt letter}]  intended for producing personal letters.  This style


+will allow you to produce all the elements of a well laid out letter:


+addresses, date, signature, etc.


+\end{description}


+


+These standard styles can be modified by a number of {\em style options\/}.


+They appear in square brackets after the \verb|\documentstyle| command.


+Only one style can ever be used but you can have more than one style option,


+in which case their names should be separated by commas.  The standard style


+options are:


+\begin{description}


+


+\item[{\tt 11pt}]  prints the document using eleven-point type for the running


+ text


+rather that the ten-point type normally used. Eleven-point type is about


+ten percent larger than ten-point.


+


+\item[{\tt 12pt}]  prints the document using twelve-point type for the running


+ text


+rather than the ten-point type normally used. Twelve-point type is about


+twenty percent larger than ten-point.


+


+\item[{\tt twoside}]  causes documents in the article or report styles to be


+formatted for printing on both sides of the paper.  This is the default for the


+book style.


+


+\item[{\tt twocolumn}] produces two column on each page.


+


+\item[{\tt titlepage}]  causes the \verb|\maketitle| command to generate a


+title on a separate page for documents in the \fn{article} style.


+A separate page is always used in both the \fn{report} and \fn{book} styles.


+


+\end{description}


+There is one further option which, while not standard to \LaTeX{}, is very


+useful in all European countries. The \fn{a4} option causes the output in all


+of the standard styles to be adjusted to fit correctly on A4 paper.  \LaTeX{}


+was designed in America where the standard paper is shorter and slightly wider


+than A4; without this option you will find that your output looks a little


+strange.


+


+\section{Environments}


+


+We mentioned earlier the idea of identifying a quotation to \LaTeX{} so that


+it could arrange to typeset it correctly. To do this you enclose the


+quotation between the commands \verb|\begin{quotation}| and


+\verb|\end{quotation}|.


+This is an example of a \LaTeX{} construction called an {\em environment\/}.


+A number of


+special effects are obtained by putting text into particular environments.


+


+\subsection{Quotations}


+


+There are two environments for quotations: \fn{quote} and \fn{quotation}.


+\fn{quote} is used either for a short quotation or for a sequence of


+short quotations separated by blank lines:


+\egstart


+\begin{verbatim}


+US presidents ... pithy remarks:


+\begin{quote}


+The buck stops here.


+


+I am not a crook.


+\end{quote}


+\end{verbatim}


+\egmid%


+US presidents have been known for their pithy remarks:


+\begin{quote}


+The buck stops here.


+


+I am not a crook.


+\end{quote}


+\egend


+


+Use the \fn{quotation} environment for quotations that consist of more


+than one paragraph.  Paragraphs in the input are separated by blank


+lines as usual:


+\egstart


+\begin{verbatim}


+Here is some advice to remember:


+\begin{quotation}


+Environments for making


+...other things as well.


+


+Many problems


+...environments.


+\end{quotation}


+\end{verbatim}


+\egmid%


+Here is some advice to remember:


+\begin{quotation}


+Environments for making quotations


+can be used for other things as well.


+


+Many problems can be solved by


+novel applications of existing


+environments.


+\end{quotation}


+\egend


+


+\subsection{Centering and Flushing}


+


+Text can be centred on the page by putting it within the \fn{center}


+environment, and it will appear flush against the left or right margins if it


+is placed within the \fn{flushleft} or \fn{flushright} environments.


+Notice the


+spelling of \fn{center}---unfortunately \LaTeX{} doesn't understand the English


+spelling.


+


+Text within these environments will be formatted in the normal way, in


+{\samepage


+particular the ends of the lines that you type are just regarded as spaces.  To


+indicate a ``newline'' you need to type the \verb|\\| command.  For example:


+\egstart


+\begin{verbatim}


+\begin{center}


+one


+two


+three \\


+four \\


+five


+\end{center}


+\end{verbatim}


+\egmid%


+\begin{center}


+one


+two


+three \\


+four \\


+five


+\end{center}


+\egend


+}


+


+\subsection{Lists}


+


+There are three environments for constructing lists.  In each one each new


+item is begun with an \verb|\item| command.  In the \fn{itemize} environment


+the start of each item is given a marker, in the \fn{enumerate}


+environment each item is marked by a number.  These environments can be nested


+within each other in which case the amount of indentation used


+is adjusted accordingly:


+\egstart


+\begin{verbatim}


+\begin{itemize}


+\item Itemized lists are handy.


+\item However, don't forget


+  \begin{enumerate}


+  \item The `item' command.


+  \item The `end' command.


+  \end{enumerate}


+\end{itemize}


+\end{verbatim}


+\egmid%


+\begin{itemize}


+\item Itemized lists are handy.


+\item However, don't forget


+  \begin{enumerate}


+  \item The `item' command.


+  \item The `end' command.


+  \end{enumerate}


+\end{itemize}


+\egend


+


+The third list making environment is \fn{description}.  In a description you


+specify the item labels inside square brackets after the \verb|\item| command.


+For example:


+\egstart


+\begin{verbatim}


+Three animals that you should


+know about are:


+\begin{description}


+  \item[gnat] A small animal...


+  \item[gnu] A large animal...


+  \item[armadillo] A ...


+\end{description}


+\end{verbatim}


+\egmid%


+Three animals that you should


+know about are:


+\begin{description}


+  \item[gnat] A small animal that causes no end of trouble.


+  \item[gnu] A large animal that causes no end of trouble.


+  \item[armadillo] A medium-sized animal.


+\end{description}


+\egend


+


+\subsection{Tables}


+


+Because \LaTeX{} will almost always convert a sequence of spaces


+into a single space,


+it can be rather difficult to lay out tables.  See what happens in this example


+\nolinebreak


+\egstart


+\begin{verbatim}


+\begin{flushleft}


+Income  Expenditure Result   \\


+20s 0d  19s 11d     happiness \\


+20s 0d  20s 1d      misery  \\


+\end{flushleft}


+\end{verbatim}


+\egmid%


+\begin{flushleft}


+Income  Expenditure Result   \\


+20s 0d  19s 11d     happiness \\


+20s 0d  20s 1d      misery  \\


+\end{flushleft}


+\egend


+


+The \fn{tabbing} environment overcomes this problem. Within it you set


+tabstops and tab to them much like you do on a typewriter.  Tabstops are


+set with the \verb|\=| command, and the \verb|\>| command moves to the


+next stop.  The


+\verb|\\| command is used to separate each line.  A line that ends \verb|\kill|


+produces no output, and can be used to set tabstops:


+\nolinebreak


+\egstart


+\begin{verbatim}


+\begin{tabbing}


+Income \=Expenditure \=    \kill


+Income \>Expenditure \>Result \\


+20s 0d \>19s 11d \>Happiness   \\


+20s 0d \>20s 1d  \>Misery    \\


+\end{tabbing}


+\end{verbatim}


+\egmid%


+\begin{tabbing}


+Income \=Expenditure \=    \kill


+Income \>Expenditure \>Result \\


+20s 0d \>19s 11d \>Happiness   \\


+20s 0d \>20s 1d  \>Misery    \\


+\end{tabbing}


+\egend


+


+Unlike a typewriter's tab key, the \verb|\>| command always moves to the next


+tabstop in sequence, even if this means moving to the left.  This can cause


+text to be overwritten if the gap between two tabstops is too small.


+


+\subsection{Verbatim Output}


+


+Sometimes you will want to include text exactly as it appears on a terminal


+screen.  For example, you might want to include part of a computer program.


+Not only do you want \LaTeX{} to stop playing around with the layout of your


+text, you also want to be able to type all the characters on your keyboard


+without confusing \LaTeX. The \fn{verbatim} environment has this effect:


+\egstart


+\begin{flushleft}


+\verb|The section of program in|  \\


+\verb|question is:|               \\


+\verb|\begin{verbatim}|           \\


+\verb|{ this finds %a & %b }|     \\[2ex]


+


+\verb|for i := 1 to 27 do|        \\


+\ \ \ \verb|begin|                \\


+\ \ \ \verb|table[i] := fn(i);|   \\


+\ \ \ \verb|process(i)|           \\


+\ \ \ \verb|end;|                 \\


+\verb|\end{verbatim}|


+\end{flushleft}


+\egmid%


+The section of program in


+question is:


+\begin{verbatim}


+{ this finds %a & %b }


+


+for i := 1 to 27 do


+   begin


+   table[i] := fn(i);


+   process(i)


+   end;


+


+\end{verbatim}


+\egend


+


+\section{Type Styles}


+


+We have already come across the \verb|\em| command for changing


+typeface.  Here is a full list of the available typefaces:


+\begin{quote}\begin{tabbing}


+\verb|\sc|~~ \= \sc Small Caps~~~ \= \verb|\sc|~~ \= \sc Small Caps~~~


+                                  \= \verb|\sc|~~ \=                   \kill


+\verb|\rm|   \> \rm Roman         \> \verb|\it|   \> \it Italic


+                                  \> \verb|\sc|   \> \sc Small Caps    \\


+\verb|\em|   \> \em Emphatic      \> \verb|\sl| \> \sl Slanted


+                                  \> \verb|\tt|   \> \tt Typewriter     \\


+\verb|\bf|   \> \bf Boldface      \> \verb|\sf| \> \sf Sans Serif


+\end{tabbing}\end{quote}


+


+Remember that these commands are used {\em inside\/} a pair of braces to limit


+the amount of text that they effect.  In addition to the eight typeface


+commands, there are a set of commands that alter the size of the type.  These


+commands are:


+\begin{quotation}\begin{tabbing}


+\verb|\footnotesize|~~ \= \verb|\footnotesize|~~ \= \verb|\footnotesize| \=


+ \kill


+\verb|\tiny|           \> \verb|\small|          \> \verb|\large|        \>


+\verb|\huge|  \\


+\verb|\scriptsize|     \> \verb|\normalsize|     \> \verb|\Large|        \>


+\verb|\Huge|  \\


+\verb|\footnotesize|   \>                        \> \verb|\LARGE|


+\end{tabbing}\end{quotation}


+


+\section{Sectioning Commands and Tables of Contents}


+


+Technical documents, like this one, are often divided into sections.


+Each section has a heading containing a title and a number for easy


+reference.  \LaTeX{} has a series of commands that will allow you to identify


+different sorts of sections.  Once you have done this \LaTeX{} takes on the


+responsibility of laying out the title and of providing the numbers.


+


+The commands that you can use are:


+\begin{quote}\begin{tabbing}


+\verb|\subsubsection| \= \verb|\subsubsection|~~~~~~~~~~ \=           \kill


+\verb|\chapter|       \> \verb|\subsection|    \> \verb|\paragraph|    \\


+\verb|\section|       \> \verb|\subsubsection| \> \verb|\subparagraph| \\


+\end{tabbing}\end{quote}


+The naming of these last two is unfortunate, since they do not really have


+anything to do with `paragraphs' in the normal sense of the word; they are just


+lower levels of section.  In most document styles, headings made with


+\verb|\paragraph| and \verb|\subparagraph| are not numbered.  \verb|\chapter|


+is not available in document style \fn{article}.  The commands should be used


+in the order given, since sections are numbered within chapters, subsections


+within sections, etc.


+


+A seventh sectioning command, \verb|\part|, is also available.  Its use is


+always optional, and it is used to divide a large document into series of


+parts.  It does not alter the numbering used for any of the other commands.


+


+Including the command \verb|\tableofcontents| in you document will cause a


+contents list to be included, containing information collected from the various


+sectioning commands.  You will notice that each time your document is run


+through \LaTeX{} the table of contents is always made up of the headings from


+the previous version of the document.  This is because \LaTeX{} collects


+information for the table as it processes the document, and then includes it


+the next time it is run.  This can sometimes mean that the document has to be


+processed through \LaTeX{} twice to get a correct table of contents.


+


+\section{Producing Special Symbols}


+


+You can include in you \LaTeX{} document a wide range of symbols that do not


+appear on you your keyboard. For a start, you can add an accent to any letter:


+\begin{quote}\begin{tabbing}


+


+\t{oo} \= \verb|\t{oo}|~~~ \=


+\t{oo} \= \verb|\t{oo}|~~~ \=


+\t{oo} \= \verb|\t{oo}|~~~ \=


+\t{oo} \= \verb|\t{oo}|~~~ \=


+\t{oo} \= \verb|\t{oo}|~~~ \=


+\t{oo} \=                       \kill


+


+\a`{o} \> \verb|\`{o}|  \> \~{o}  \> \verb|\~{o}|  \> \v{o}  \> \verb|\v{o}| \>


+\c{o}  \> \verb|\c{o}|  \> \a'{o} \> \verb|\'{o}|  \\


+\a={o} \> \verb|\={o}|  \> \H{o}  \> \verb|\H{o}|  \> \d{o}  \> \verb|\d{o}| \>


+\^{o}  \> \verb|\^{o}|  \> \.{o}  \> \verb|\.{o}|  \\


+\t{oo} \> \verb|\t{oo}| \> \b{o}  \> \verb|\b{o}|  \\  \"{o} \> \verb|\"{o}| \>


+\u{o}  \> \verb|\u{o}|  \\


+\end{tabbing}\end{quote}


+


+A number of other symbols are available, and can be used by including the


+following commands:


+\begin{quote}\begin{tabbing}


+


+\LaTeX~\= \verb|\copyright|~~~~ \= \LaTeX~\= \verb|\copyright|~~~~ \=


+\LaTeX~\=  \kill


+


+\dag       \> \verb|\dag|       \> \S     \> \verb|\S|     \>


+\copyright \> \verb|\copyright| \\


+\ddag      \> \verb|\ddag|      \> \P     \> \verb|\P|     \>


+\pounds    \> \verb|\pounds|    \\


+\oe        \> \verb|\oe|        \> \OE    \> \verb|\OE|    \>


+\ae        \> \verb|\AE|        \\


+\AE        \> \verb|\AE|        \> \aa    \> \verb|\aa|    \>


+\AA        \> \verb|\AA|        \\


+\o         \> \verb|\o|         \> \O     \> \verb|\O|     \>


+\l         \> \verb|\l|         \\


+\L         \> \verb|\E|         \> \ss    \> \verb|\ss|    \>


+?`         \> \verb|?`|         \\


+!`         \> \verb|!`|         \> \ldots \> \verb|\ldots| \>


+\LaTeX     \> \verb|\LaTeX|     \\


+\end{tabbing}\end{quote}


+There is also a \verb|\today| command that prints the current date. When you


+use these commands remember that \LaTeX{} will ignore any spaces that


+follow them, so that you can type `\verb|\pounds 20|' to get `\pounds 20'.


+However, if you type `\verb|LaTeX is wonderful|' you will get `\LaTeX is


+wonderful'---notice the lack of space after \LaTeX.


+To overcome this problem you can follow any of these commands by a


+pair of empty brackets and then any spaces that you wish to include,


+and you will see that


+\verb|\LaTeX{} really is wonderful!| (\LaTeX{} really is wonderful!).


+


+Finally, \LaTeX{} `math' mode, normally used to layout mathematical


+formulae, gives access to an even larger range of symbols, including the


+upper and lower case greek mathematical alphabet, calligraphic letters,


+mathematical operators and relations, arrows and a whole lot more.  This


+document has not mentioned math mode, and it isn't going to either, so you


+will have to refer to the manual if you really need something that you


+can't get otherwise.


+


+\section{Titles}\label{sec:title}


+


+Most documents have a title.  To title a \LaTeX{} document, you include the


+following commands in your document, usually just after


+\verb|begin{document}|.


+\begin{quote}\footnotesize\begin{verbatim}


+\title{required title}


+\author{required author}


+\date{required date}


+\maketitle


+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}


+If there are several authors, then their names should be separated by


+\verb|\and|; they can also be separated by \verb|\\| if you want them to be


+centred on different lines.  If the \verb|\date| command is left out, then the


+current date will be printed.


+\egstart


+\begin{verbatim}


+\title{Essential \LaTeX}


+\author{J Warbrick\and A N Other}


+\date{14th February 1988}


+\maketitle


+\end{verbatim}


+\egmid


+\begin{center}


+{\normalsize Essential \LaTeX}\\[4ex]


+J Warbrick\hspace{1em}A N Other\\[2ex]


+14th February 1988


+\end{center}


+\egend


+


+The exact appearance of the title varies depending on


+the document style.  In styles \fn{report} and \fn{book} the title appears on a


+page of its own. In the \fn{article} style it normally appears at the top


+of the first page, the style option \fn{titlepage} will alter this (see


+Section~\ref{sec:styles}).


+


+\section{Letters}


+


+Producing letters is simple with \LaTeX{}. To do this you use the document


+style {\tt letter}. You can make any number of


+letters with a single input file.


+Your name and address, which are likely to be


+the same for all letters, are given once at the top of the file.  Each letter


+is produced by a {\tt letter} environment, having the name and address of the


+recipient as its argument.  The letter itself begins with an \verb|\opening|


+command to generate the salutation.


+


+The letter ends with a \verb|\closing| command, you can use the commands


+\verb|\encl| and \verb|\cc| to generate lists of enclosures and people to whom


+you are sending copies. Any text that follows the \verb|\closing| must be


+proceeded by a \verb|\ps| command.  This command produces no text---you'll have


+to type ``P.S.'' yourself---but is needed to format the additional text


+correctly.


+


+Perhaps an example will make this clearer:


+\begin{quote}\footnotesize\begin{verbatim}


+\documentstyle{letter}


+\begin{document}


+


+\address{1234 Avenue of the Armadillos \\


+         Gnu York, G.Y. 56789}


+\signature{R. (Ma) Dillo \\ Director of Cuisine}


+


+\begin{letter}{G. Natheniel Picking \\


+               Acme Exterminators \\


+               Illinois}


+


+\opening{Dear Nat,}


+


+I'm afraid that the armadillo problem is still with us.


+I did everything ...


+


+... and I hope that you can get rid of the nasty


+beasts this time.


+


+\closing{Best Regards,}


+\cc{Jimmy Carter\\Richard M. Nixon}


+\end{letter}


+


+\end{document}


+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}


+


+\section{Errors}


+


+When you create a new input file for \LaTeX{} you will probably make mistakes.


+Everybody does, and it's nothing to be worried about.  As with most computer


+programs, there are two sorts of mistake that you can make: those that \LaTeX{}


+notices and those that it doesn't.  To take a rather silly example, since


+\LaTeX{} doesn't understand what you are saying it isn't going to be worried if


+you mis-spell some of the words in your text.  You will just have to accurately


+proof-read your printed output.  On the other hand, if you mis-spell one of


+the environment names in your file then \LaTeX won't know what you want it


+to do.


+


+When this sort of thing happens, \LaTeX{} prints an error message on your


+terminal screen and then stops and waits for you to take some action.


+Unfortunately, the error messages that it produces are rather user-unfriendly


+and not a little frightening.  Nevertheless, if you know where to look they


+will probably tell you where the error is and went wrong.


+


+Consider what would happen if you mistyped \verb|\begin{itemize}| so that it


+became \verb|\begin{itemie}|.  When \LaTeX{} processes this instruction, it


+displays the following on your terminal:


+\begin{quote}\footnotesize\begin{verbatim}


+LaTeX error.  See LaTeX manual for explanation.


+              Type  H <return>  for immediate help.


+! Environment itemie undefined.


+\@latexerr ...for immediate help.}\errmessage {#1}


+                                                  \endgroup


+l.140 \begin{itemie}


+


+?


+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}


+After typing the `?' \LaTeX{} stops and waits for you to tell it what to do.


+


+The first two lines of the message just tell you that the error was detected by


+\LaTeX{}. The third line, the one that starts `!' is the {\em error indicator}.


+ It


+tells you what the problem is, though until you have had some experience of


+\LaTeX{} this may not mean a lot to you.  In this case it is just telling you


+that it doesn't recognise an environment called \fn{itemie}.


+The next two lines tell you what


+\LaTeX{} was doing when it found the error, they are irrelevant at the moment


+and can be ignored. The final line is called the {\em error locator}, and is


+a copy of the line from your file that caused the problem.


+It start with a line number to help you to find it in your file, and


+if the error was in the middle of a line it will be shown


+broken at the point where \LaTeX{} realised that there was an error.  \LaTeX{}


+can sometimes pass the point where the real error is before discovering that


+something is wrong, but it doesn't usually get very far.


+


+At this point you could do several things.  If you knew enough about \LaTeX{}


+you might be able to fix the problem, or you could type `X' and press the


+return key to stop \LaTeX{} running while you go and correct the error.  The


+best thing to do, however, is just to press the return key.  This will allow


+\LaTeX{} to go on running as if nothing had happened.  If you have made one


+mistake, then you have probably made several and you may as well try to find


+them all in one go.  It's much more efficient to do it this way than to run


+\LaTeX{} over and over again fixing one error at a time. Don't worry about


+remembering what the errors were---a copy of all the error messages is being


+saved in a {\em log\/} file so that you can look at them afterwards.  See your


+{\em local guide\/} to find out what this file is called.


+


+If you look at the line that caused the error it's normally obvious what the


+problem was.  If you can't work out what you problem is look at the hints


+below, and if they don't help consult Chapter~6 of the manual.  It contains a


+list of all of the error messages that you are likely to encounter together with


+some hints as to what may have caused them.


+


+Some of the most common mistakes that cause errors are


+\begin{itemize}


+\item A mis-spelt command or environment name.


+\item Improperly matched `\verb|{|' and `\verb|}|'---remember that they should


+ always


+come in pairs.


+\item Trying to use one of the ten special characters \verb|# $ % & _ { } ~ ^|


+and \verb|\| as an ordinary printing symbol.


+\item A missing \verb|\end| command.


+\item A missing command argument (that's the bit enclosed in '\verb|{|' and


+`\verb|}|').


+\end{itemize}


+


+One error can get \LaTeX{} so confused that it reports a series of spurious


+errors as a result.  If you have an error that you understand, followed by a


+series that you don't, then try correcting the first error---the rest


+may vanish as if by magic.


+


+Sometimes \LaTeX{} may write a {\tt *} and stop without an error message.  This


+is normally caused by a missing \verb|\end{document}| command, but other errors


+can cause it.  If this happens type \verb|\stop| and press the return key.


+


+Finally, \LaTeX{} will sometimes print {\em warning\/} messages.  They report


+problems that were not bad enough to cause \LaTeX{} to stop processing, but


+nevertheless may require investigation.  The most common problems are


+`overfull' and `underfull' lines of text.  A message like:


+\begin{quote}\footnotesize\begin{verbatim}


+Overfull \hbox (10.58649pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 172--175


+[]\tenrm Mathematical for-mu-las may be dis-played. A dis-played


+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}


+indicates that \LaTeX{} could not find a good place to break a line when laying


+out a paragraph.  As a result, it was forced to let the line stick out into the


+right-hand margin, in this case by 10.6 points.  Since a point is about 1/72nd


+of an inch this may be rather hard to see, but it will be there none the less.


+


+This particular problem happens because \LaTeX{} is rather fussy about line


+breaking, and it would rather generate a line that is too long than generate a


+paragraph that doesn't meet its high standards.  The simplest way around the


+problem is to enclose the entire offending paragraph between


+\verb|\begin{sloppypar}| and \verb|\end{sloppypar}| commands.  This tells


+\LaTeX{} that you are happy for it to break its own rules while it is working on


+that particular bit of text.


+


+Alternatively, messages about ``Underfull \verb|\hbox'es''| may appear.


+These are lines that had to have more space inserted between


+words than \LaTeX{} would have liked.  In general there is not much that you


+can do about these.  Your output will look fine, even if the line looks a bit


+stretched.  About the only thing you could do is to re-write the offending


+paragraph!


+


+\section{A Final Reminder}


+


+You now know enough \LaTeX{} to produce a wide range of documents.  But this


+document has only scratched the surface of the


+things that \LaTeX{} can do.  This entire document was itself produced with


+\LaTeX{} (with no sticking things in or clever use of a photocopier) and even


+it hasn't used all the features that it could.  From this you may get some


+feeling for the power that \LaTeX{} puts at your disposal.


+


+Please remember what was said in the introduction: if you {\bf do} have a


+complex document to produce then {\bf go and read the manual}.  You will be


+wasting your time if you rely only on what you have read here.


+


+One other warning: having


+dabbled with \LaTeX{} your documents will never be the same again \ldots.


+


+\end{document}


diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/essentials.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/essentials.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..303cae0b99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/essentials.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,906 @@
+% Essential LaTeX - Jon Warbrick 02/88
+%   - Edited May, July 2000 -E. Benedict
+
+
+% Copyright (C) Jon Warbrick and Plymouth Polytechnic 1989
+% Permission is granted to reproduce the document in any way providing
+% that it is distributed for free, except for any reasonable charges for
+% printing, distribution, staff time, etc.  Direct commercial
+% exploitation is not permitted.  Extracts may be made from this
+% document providing an acknowledgment of the original source is
+% maintained.
+
+% NOTICE: This document has been edited for use in the UW-Madison
+% Example Thesis file.
+
+
+% counters used for the sample file example
+\newcounter{savesection}
+\newcounter{savesubsection}
+
+
+% commands to do 'LaTeX Manual-like' examples
+
+\newlength{\egwidth}\setlength{\egwidth}{0.42\textwidth}
+
+\newenvironment{eg}{\begin{list}{}{\setlength{\leftmargin}%
+{0.05\textwidth}\setlength{\rightmargin}{\leftmargin}}%
+\item[]\footnotesize}{\end{list}}
+
+\newenvironment{egbox}{\begin{minipage}[t]{\egwidth}}{\end{minipage}}
+
+\newcommand{\egstart}{\begin{eg}\begin{egbox}}
+\newcommand{\egmid}{\end{egbox}\hfill\begin{egbox}}
+\newcommand{\egend}{\end{egbox}\end{eg}}
+
+% one or two other commands
+\newcommand{\fn}[1]{\hbox{\tt #1}}
+\newcommand{\llo}[1]{(see line #1)}
+\newcommand{\lls}[1]{(see lines #1)}
+\newcommand{\bs}{$\backslash$}
+
+
+\chapter{Essential \LaTeX{}}
+
+This chapter introduces some key ideas behind \LaTeX{} and give you the ``essential''
+items of information.  This chapter is an edited form of the paper
+``Essential \LaTeX{}'' by Jon Warbrick, Plymouth Polytechnic.
+
+\section{Introduction}
+This document is an attempt to give you all the essential
+information that you will need in order to use the \LaTeX{} Document
+Preparation System.  Only very basic features are covered, and a
+vast amount of detail has been omitted.  In a document of this size
+it is not possible to include everything that you might need to know,
+and if you intend to make extensive use of the program you should
+refer to a more complete reference.  Attempting to produce complex
+documents using only the information found below will require
+much more work than it should, and will probably produce a less
+than satisfactory result.
+
+The main reference for \LaTeX{} is {\em The \LaTeX{} User's guide and
+Reference Manual\/} by Leslie Lamport.  This contains most of the
+information that you will ever need to know about the program, and
+you will need access to a copy if you are to use \LaTeX{} seriously.
+You should also consider getting a copy of {\em The \LaTeX{}
+Companion\/} 
+
+\section{How does \LaTeX{} work?}
+
+In order to use \LaTeX{} you generate a file containing
+both the text that you wish to print and instructions to tell \LaTeX{}
+how you want it to appear.  You will normally create
+this file using your system's text editor.  You can give the file any name you
+like, but it should end ``\fn{.TEX}'' to identify the file's contents.
+You then get \LaTeX{} to process the file, and it creates a
+new file of typesetting commands; this has the same name as your file but
+the ``\fn{.TEX}'' ending is replaced by ``\fn{.DVI}''.  This stands for
+`{\it D\/}e{\it v\/}ice {\it I\/}ndependent' and, as the name implies, this file
+can be used to create output on a range of printing devices.
+Your {\em local guide\/} will go into more detail.
+
+Rather than encourage you to dictate exactly how your document
+should be laid out, \LaTeX{} instructions allow you describe its
+{\em logical structure\/}.  For example, you can think of a quotation
+embedded within your text as an element of this logical structure: you would
+normally expect a quotation to be displayed in a recognisable style to set it
+off from the rest of the text.
+A human typesetter would recognise the quotation and handle
+it accordingly, but since \LaTeX{} is only a computer program it requires
+your help.  There are therefore \LaTeX{} commands that allow you to
+identify quotations and as a result allow \LaTeX{} to typeset them correctly.
+
+Fundamental to \LaTeX{} is the idea of a {\em document style\/} that
+determines exactly how a document will be formatted.  \LaTeX{} provides
+standard document styles that describe how standard logical structures
+(such as quotations) should be formatted.  You may have to supplement
+these styles by specifying the formatting of logical structures
+peculiar to your document, such as mathematical formulae.  You can
+also modify the standard document styles or even create an entirely
+new one, though you should know the basic principles of typographical
+design before creating a radically new style.
+
+There are a number of good reasons for concentrating on the logical
+structure rather than on the appearance of a document.  It prevents
+you from making elementary typographical errors in the mistaken
+idea that they improve the aesthetics of a document---you should
+remember that the primary function of document design is to make
+documents easier to read, not prettier.  It is more flexible, since
+you only need to alter the definition of the quotation style
+to change the appearance of all the quotations in a document.  Most
+important of all, logical design encourages better writing.
+A visual system makes it easier to create visual effects rather than
+a coherent structure; logical design encourages you to concentrate on
+your writing and makes it harder to use formatting as a substitute
+for good writing.
+
+\section{A Sample \LaTeX{} file}
+
+
+\begin{figure} %---------------------------------------------------------------
+{\singlespace\tt\footnotesize\begin{verbatim}
+ 1: % SMALL.TEX -- Released 5 July 1985
+ 2: % USE THIS FILE AS A MODEL FOR MAKING YOUR OWN LaTeX INPUT FILE.
+ 3: % EVERYTHING TO THE RIGHT OF A  %  IS A REMARK TO YOU AND IS IGNORED
+ 4: % BY LaTeX.
+ 5: %
+ 6: % WARNING!  DO NOT TYPE ANY OF THE FOLLOWING 10 CHARACTERS EXCEPT AS
+ 7: % DIRECTED:        &   $   #   %   _   {   }   ^   ~   \
+ 8:
+ 9: \documentclass[11pt,a4]{article}  % YOUR INPUT FILE MUST CONTAIN THESE
+10: \begin{document}                  % TWO LINES PLUS THE \end COMMAND AT
+11:                                   % THE END
+12:
+13: \section{Simple Text}          % THIS COMMAND MAKES A SECTION TITLE.
+14:
+15: Words are separated by one or    more      spaces.  Paragraphs are
+16:     separated by one or more blank lines.  The output is not affected
+17: by adding extra spaces or extra blank lines to the input file.
+18:
+19:
+20: Double quotes are typed like this: ``quoted text''.
+21: Single quotes are typed like this: `single-quoted text'.
+22:
+23: Long dashes are typed as three dash characters---like this.
+24:
+25: Italic text is typed like this: {\em this is italic text}.
+26: Bold   text is typed like this: {\bf this is  bold  text}.
+27:
+28: \subsection{A Warning or Two}        % THIS MAKES A SUBSECTION TITLE.
+29:
+30: If you get too much space after a mid-sentence period---abbreviations
+31: like etc.\ are the common culprits)---then type a backslash followed by
+32: a space after the period, as in this sentence.
+33:
+34: Remember, don't type the 10 special characters (such as dollar sign and
+35: backslash) except as directed!  The following seven are printed by
+36: typing a backslash in front of them:  \$  \&  \#  \%  \_  \{  and  \}.
+37: The manual tells how to make other symbols.
+38:
+39: \end{document}                    % THE INPUT FILE ENDS LIKE THIS
+\end{verbatim}  }
+
+\caption{A Sample \LaTeX{} File}\label{fig:sample}
+
+\end{figure} %-----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+
+Have a look at the example \LaTeX{} file in Figure~\ref{fig:sample}.  It
+is a slightly modified copy of the standard \LaTeX{} example file
+\fn{SMALL.TEX}.  The line numbers down the left-hand side
+are not part of the file, but have been added to make it easier to
+identify various portions.
+
+Try entering this file (without the line numbers), save the text as \fn{small.tex},
+next run \LaTeX{} on it, and then view the output:
+
+{\tt \singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+% latex small
+% xdvi small               # displays the output on the screen
+% dvips -o small.ps small  # to create a PostScript file, small.ps
+% lp -d<printer> small.ps  # to print
+\end{verbatim}}
+
+\subsection{Running Text}
+
+Most documents consist almost entirely of running text---words formed
+into sentences, which are in turn formed into paragraphs---and the example file
+is no exception. Describing running text poses no problems, you just type
+it in naturally. In the output that it produces, \LaTeX{} will fill
+lines and adjust the
+spacing between words to give tidy left and right margins.
+The spacing and distribution of the words in your input
+file will have no effect at all on the eventual output.
+Any number of spaces in your input file
+are treated as a single space by \LaTeX{}, it also regards the
+end of each line as a space between words \lls{15--17}.
+A new paragraph is
+indicated by a blank line in your input file, so don't leave
+any blank lines unless you really wish to start a paragraph.
+
+\LaTeX{} reserves a number of the less common keyboard characters for its
+own use. The ten characters
+\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
+#  $  %  &  ~  _  ^  \  {  }
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+should not appear as part of your text, because if they do
+\LaTeX{} will get confused.
+
+\subsection{\LaTeX{} Commands}
+
+There are a number of words in the file that start `\verb|\|' \lls{9,
+10 and 13}.  These are \LaTeX{} {\em commands\/} and they describe
+the structure of your document. There are a number of things that you
+should realize about these commands:
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item All \LaTeX{} commands consist of a `\verb|\|' followed by one or more
+characters.
+
+\item \LaTeX{} commands should be typed using the correct mixture of upper- and
+lower-case letters.  \verb|\BEGIN| is {\em not\/} the same as \verb|\begin|.
+
+\item Some commands are placed within your text.  These are used to
+switch things, like different typestyles, on and off. The \verb|\em|
+command is used like this to emphasize text, normally by changing to
+an {\it italic\/} typestyle \llo{25}.  The command and the text are
+always enclosed between `\verb|{|' and `\verb|}|'---the `\verb|{\em|'
+turns the effect on and and the `\verb|}|' turns it off.
+
+\item There are other commands that look like
+\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
+\command{text}
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+In this case the text is called the ``argument'' of the command.  The
+\verb|\section| command is like this \llo{13}.
+Sometimes you have to use curly brackets `\verb|{}|' to enclose the argument,
+sometimes square brackets `\verb|[]|', and sometimes both at once.
+There is method behind this apparent madness, but for the
+time being you should be sure to copy the commands exactly as given.
+
+\item When a command's name is made up entirely of letters, you must make sure
+that the end of the command is marked by something that isn't a letter.
+This is usually either the opening bracket around the command's argument, or
+it's a space.  When it's a space, that space is always ignored by \LaTeX. We
+will see later that this can sometimes be a problem.
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Overall structure}
+
+There are some \LaTeX{} commands that must appear in every document.
+The actual text of the document always starts with a
+\verb|\begin{document}| command and ends with an \verb|\end{document}|
+command \lls{10 and 39}.  Anything that comes after the \break
+\verb|\end{document}| command is ignored.  Everything that comes
+before the \break\verb|\begin{document}| command is called the
+{\em preamble\/}. The preamble can only contain \LaTeX{} commands
+to describe the document's style.
+
+One command that must appear in the preamble is the
+\verb|\documentclass| command \llo{9}.  This command specifies the
+overall style for the document.  Our example file is a simple
+technical document, and uses the {\tt article\/} class.  The document
+you are reading was produced with the {\tt withesis\/} class. There
+are other classes that you can use, as you will find out later on in
+this document.
+
+\subsection{Other Things to Look At}
+
+\LaTeX{} can print both opening and closing quote characters, and can manage
+either of these either single or double.  To do this it uses the two quote
+characters from your keyboard: {\tt `} and {\tt '}. You will probably think of
+{\tt '} as the ordinary single quote character which probably looks like
+{\tt\symbol{'23}} or {\tt\symbol{'15}} on your keyboard,
+
+and {\tt `} as a ``funny'' character that probably appears as
+{\tt\symbol{'22}}. You type these characters once for single quote
+\llo{21},  and twice for double quotes \llo{20}. The double quote
+character {\tt "} itself is almost never used and should not be used
+unless you want your text to look "funny" (compare the quote in the
+previous sentence).
+
+\LaTeX{} can produce three different kinds of dashes.
+A long dash, for use as a punctuation symbol, as is typed as three dash
+characters in a row, like this `\verb|---|' \llo{23}.  A shorter dash,
+used between numbers as in `10--20', is typed as two dash
+characters in a row, while a single dash character is used as a hyphen.
+
+From time to time you will need to include one or more of the \LaTeX{}
+special symbols in your text.  Seven of them can be printed by
+making them into commands by proceeding them by backslash
+\llo{36}.  The remaining three symbols can be produced by more
+advanced commands, as can symbols that do not appear on your keyboard
+such as \dag, \ddag, \S, \pounds, \copyright, $\sharp$ and $\clubsuit$.
+
+It is sometimes useful to include comments in a \LaTeX{} file, to remind
+you of what you have done or why you did it.  Everything to the
+right of a \verb|%| sign is ignored by \LaTeX{}, and so it can
+be used to introduce a comment.
+
+\section{Document Classes and Class Options}\label{sec:styles}
+
+There are four standard document classes available in \LaTeX:
+\nobreak
+
+\begin{description}
+
+\item[{\tt article}]  intended for short documents and articles for publication.
+Articles do not have chapters, and when \verb|\maketitle| is used to generate
+
+a title (see Section~\ref{sec:title}) it appears at the top of the first page
+
+rather than on a page of its own.
+
+\item[{\tt report}] intended for longer technical documents.
+It is similar to
+{\tt article}, except that it contains chapters and the title appears on a page
+of its own.
+
+\item[{\tt book}] intended as a basis for book publication.  Page layout is
+adjusted assuming that the output will eventually be used to print on
+both sides of the paper.
+
+\item[{\tt letter}]  intended for producing personal letters.  This style
+will allow you to produce all the elements of a well laid out letter:
+addresses, date, signature, etc.
+\end{description}
+
+An additional document class, the one used for this document and for
+University of Wisconsin--Madison theses, is \fn{withesis}.
+
+
+These standard classes can be modified by a number of {\em class
+options\/}. They appear in square brackets after the
+\verb|\documentclass| command. Only one class can ever be used but
+you can have more than one class option, in which case their names
+should be separated by commas.  The standard style options are:
+\begin{description}
+
+\item[{\tt 11pt}]  prints the document using eleven-point type for the running
+ text
+rather that the ten-point type normally used. Eleven-point type is about
+ten percent larger than ten-point.
+
+\item[{\tt 12pt}]  prints the document using twelve-point type for the running
+ text
+rather than the ten-point type normally used. Twelve-point type is about
+twenty percent larger than ten-point.
+
+\item[{\tt twoside}]  causes documents in the article or report styles to be
+formatted for printing on both sides of the paper.  This is the default for the
+book style.
+
+\item[{\tt twocolumn}] produces two column on each page.
+
+\item[{\tt titlepage}]  causes the \verb|\maketitle| command to generate a
+title on a separate page for documents in the \fn{article} style.
+A separate page is always used in both the \fn{report} and \fn{book} styles.
+
+\end{description}
+
+The University of Wisconsin--Madison thesis style, \fn{withesis} also
+has some class options defined.  These class options are for
+ten-point type (\fn{10pt}), tweleve-point type (\fn{12pt}), two-sided
+printing (\fn{twoside}), Master Thesis margins (\fn{msthesis}) and an
+option to print a small black box on lines which exceed the margins
+(\fn{margincheck}).
+
+\section{Environments}
+
+We mentioned earlier the idea of identifying a quotation to \LaTeX{} so that
+it could arrange to typeset it correctly. To do this you enclose the
+quotation between the commands \verb|\begin{quotation}| and
+\verb|\end{quotation}|.
+This is an example of a \LaTeX{} construction called an {\em environment\/}.
+A number of
+special effects are obtained by putting text into particular environments.
+
+\subsection{Quotations}
+
+There are two environments for quotations: \fn{quote} and \fn{quotation}.
+\fn{quote} is used either for a short quotation or for a sequence of
+short quotations separated by blank lines:
+\egstart\singlespace
+\begin{verbatim}
+US presidents ... remarks:
+\begin{quote}
+The buck stops here.
+
+I am not a crook.
+\end{quote}
+\end{verbatim}
+\egmid%
+US presidents have been known for their pithy remarks:
+\begin{quote}
+The buck stops here.
+
+I am not a crook.
+\end{quote}
+\egend
+
+Use the \fn{quotation} environment for quotations that consist of more
+than one paragraph.  Paragraphs in the input are separated by blank
+lines as usual:
+\egstart\singlespace
+\begin{verbatim}
+
+Here is some advice to remember:
+\begin{quotation}
+Environments for making
+...other things as well.
+
+Many problems
+...environments.
+\end{quotation}
+\end{verbatim}
+\egmid%
+Here is some advice to remember:
+\begin{quotation}
+Environments for making quotations
+can be used for other things as well.
+
+Many problems can be solved by
+novel applications of existing
+environments.
+\end{quotation}
+\egend
+
+\subsection{Centering and Flushing}
+
+Text can be centered on the page by putting it within the \fn{center}
+environment, and it will appear flush against the left or right margins if it
+is placed within the \fn{flushleft} or \fn{flushright} environments.
+
+Text within these environments will be formatted in the normal way, in
+{\samepage
+particular the ends of the lines that you type are just regarded as spaces.  To
+indicate a ``newline'' you need to type the \verb|\\| command.  For example:
+\egstart\singlespace
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+one
+two
+three \\
+four \\
+five
+\end{center}
+
+\end{verbatim}
+\egmid%
+\begin{center}
+
+one
+two
+three \\
+four \\
+
+five
+\end{center}
+\egend
+}
+
+\subsection{Lists}
+
+There are three environments for constructing lists.  In each one each new
+item is begun with an \verb|\item| command.  In the \fn{itemize} environment
+the start of each item is given a marker, in the \fn{enumerate}
+environment each item is marked by a number.  These environments can be nested
+within each other in which case the amount of indentation used
+is adjusted accordingly:
+\egstart\singlespace
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Itemized lists are handy.
+\item However, don't forget
+  \begin{enumerate}
+  \item The `item' command.
+  \item The `end' command.
+  \end{enumerate}
+\end{itemize}
+\end{verbatim}
+\egmid%
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Itemized lists are handy.
+\item However, don't forget
+  \begin{enumerate}
+  \item The `item' command.
+  \item The `end' command.
+  \end{enumerate}
+\end{itemize}
+\egend
+
+
+The third list making environment is \fn{description}.  In a description you
+specify the item labels inside square brackets after the \verb|\item| command.
+For example:
+\egstart\singlespace
+\begin{verbatim}
+Three animals that you should
+know about are:
+\begin{description}
+  \item[gnat] A small
+            animal...
+  \item[gnu] A large
+           animal...
+  \item[armadillo] A ...
+\end{description}
+\end{verbatim}
+\egmid%
+Three animals that you should
+know about are:
+\begin{description}
+  \item[gnat] A small animal that causes no end of trouble.
+  \item[gnu] A large animal that causes no end of trouble.
+  \item[armadillo] A medium-sized animal.
+\end{description}
+\egend
+
+\subsection{Tables}
+
+Because \LaTeX{} will almost always convert a sequence of spaces
+into a single space, it can be rather difficult to lay out tables.
+See what happens in this example
+ \nolinebreak
+\begin{eg}
+\begin{minipage}[t]{0.55\textwidth} \singlespace
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{flushleft}
+Income  Expenditure Result   \\
+20s 0d  19s 11d     happiness \\
+20s 0d  20s 1d      misery  \\
+\end{flushleft}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{minipage}
+\begin{minipage}[t]{0.3\textwidth}
+\begin{flushleft}
+Income  Expenditure Result   \\
+20s 0d  19s 11d     happiness \\
+20s 0d  20s 1d      misery  \\
+\end{flushleft}
+\end{minipage}
+\end{eg}
+
+The \fn{tabbing} environment overcomes this problem. Within it you
+set tabstops and tab to them much like you do on a typewriter.
+Tabstops are set with the \verb|\=| command, and the \verb|\>|
+command moves to the next stop.  The \verb|\\| command is used to
+separate each line.  A line that ends \verb|\kill| produces no
+output, and can be used to set tabstops:
+\nolinebreak
+\begin{eg}
+\begin{minipage}[t]{0.6\textwidth}
+\singlespace
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{tabbing}
+Income \=Expenditure \=    \kill
+Income \>Expenditure \>Result \\
+20s 0d \>19s 11d \>Happiness \\
+20s 0d \>20s 1d  \>Misery    \\
+\end{tabbing}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{minipage}
+\vspace{1ex}
+\begin{minipage}[t]{0.35\textwidth}
+\begin{tabbing}
+\singlespace
+Income \=Expenditure \=    \kill
+Income \>Expenditure \>Result \\
+20s 0d \>19s 11d \>Happiness \\
+20s 0d \>20s 1d  \>Misery    \\
+\end{tabbing}
+\end{minipage}
+\end{eg}
+
+Unlike a typewriter's tab key, the \verb|\>| command always moves to the next
+tabstop in sequence, even if this means moving to the left.  This can cause
+text to be overwritten if the gap between two tabstops is too small.
+
+\subsection{Verbatim Output}
+
+Sometimes you will want to include text exactly as it appears on a terminal
+screen.  For example, you might want to include part of a computer program.
+Not only do you want \LaTeX{} to stop playing around with the layout of your
+text, you also want to be able to type all the characters on your keyboard
+without confusing \LaTeX. The \fn{verbatim} environment has this effect:
+
+\egstart
+
+\begin{flushleft}\singlespace
+\verb|The section of program in|  \\
+ \verb|question is :|\\
+ \verb|\begin{verbatim}|           \\
+\verb|{ this finds %a & %b }|     \\[2ex]
+
+\verb|for i := 1 to 27 do|        \\
+\ \ \ \verb|begin|                \\
+\ \ \ \verb|table[i] := fn(i);|   \\
+
+\ \ \ \verb|process(i)|           \\
+\ \ \ \verb|end;|                 \\
+\verb|\end{verbatim}|
+\end{flushleft}
+\egmid%
+The section of program in
+question is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+{ this finds %a & %b }
+
+for i := 1 to 27 do
+   begin
+   table[i] := fn(i);
+   process(i)
+   end;
+
+\end{verbatim}
+\egend
+
+The \fn{withesis} document style also provides the command {\tt \verb|\verbatimfile{foo.fe}|}
+which will read in the file {\tt foo.fe} into the document in \fn{verbatim} format with
+the font \verb|\tt|.  See Appendix~\ref{matlab} for an example.
+
+\section{Type Styles}
+
+We have already come across the \verb|\em| command for changing
+typeface.  Here is a full list of the available typefaces:
+\begin{quote}\singlespace\begin{tabbing}
+\verb|\sc|~~ \= \sc Small Caps~~~ \= \verb|\sc|~~ \= \sc Small Caps~~~
+                                  \= \verb|\sc|~~ \=                   \kill
+\verb|\rm|   \> \rm Roman         \> \verb|\it|   \> \it Italic
+                                  \> \verb|\sc|   \> \sc Small Caps    \\
+\verb|\em|   \> \em Emphatic      \> \verb|\sl| \> \sl Slanted
+                                  \> \verb|\tt|   \> \tt Typewriter     \\
+\verb|\bf|   \> \bf Boldface      \> \verb|\sf| \> \sf Sans Serif
+\end{tabbing}\end{quote}
+
+Remember that these commands are used {\em inside\/} a pair of braces to limit
+the amount of text that they effect.  In addition to the eight typeface
+commands, there are a set of commands that alter the size of the type.  These
+commands are:
+\begin{quotation}\singlespace\begin{tabbing}
+\verb|\footnotesize|~~ \= \verb|\footnotesize|~~ \= \verb|\footnotesize| \=
+ \kill
+\verb|\tiny|           \> \verb|\small|          \> \verb|\large|        \>
+\verb|\huge|  \\
+\verb|\scriptsize|     \> \verb|\normalsize|     \> \verb|\Large|        \>
+\verb|\Huge|  \\
+\verb|\footnotesize|   \>                        \> \verb|\LARGE|
+\end{tabbing}\end{quotation}
+
+\section{Sectioning Commands and Tables of Contents}
+\label{ess:sectioning}
+
+Technical documents, like this one, are often divided into sections.
+Each section has a heading containing a title and a number for easy
+reference.  \LaTeX{} has a series of commands that will allow you to identify
+different sorts of sections.  Once you have done this \LaTeX{} takes on the
+responsibility of laying out the title and of providing the numbers.
+
+The commands that you can use are:
+\begin{quote}\singlespace\begin{tabbing}
+\verb|\subsubsection| \= \verb|\subsubsection|~~~~~~~~~~ \=           \kill
+\verb|\chapter|       \> \verb|\subsection|    \> \verb|\paragraph|    \\
+\verb|\section|       \> \verb|\subsubsection| \> \verb|\subparagraph| \\
+\end{tabbing}\end{quote}
+The naming of these last two is unfortunate, since they do not really have
+anything to do with `paragraphs' in the normal sense of the word; they are just
+lower levels of section.  In most document styles, headings made with
+\verb|\paragraph| and \verb|\subparagraph| are not numbered.  \verb|\chapter|
+is not available in document style \fn{article}.  The commands should be used
+in the order given, since sections are numbered within chapters, subsections
+within sections, etc.
+
+A seventh sectioning command, \verb|\part|, is also available.  Its use is
+always optional, and it is used to divide a large document into series of
+parts.  It does not alter the numbering used for any of the other commands.
+
+Including the command \verb|\tableofcontents| in you document will cause a
+contents list to be included, containing information collected from the various
+sectioning commands.  You will notice that each time your document is run
+through \LaTeX{} the table of contents is always made up of the headings from
+the previous version of the document.  This is because \LaTeX{} collects
+information for the table as it processes the document, and then includes it
+the next time it is run.  This can sometimes mean that the document has to be
+processed through \LaTeX{} twice to get a correct table of contents.
+
+\section{Producing Special Symbols}
+
+You can include in you \LaTeX{} document a wide range of symbols that do not
+appear on you your keyboard. For a start, you can add an accent to any letter:
+\begin{quote}\singlespace\begin{tabbing}
+
+\t{oo} \= \verb|\t{oo}|~~~ \=
+\t{oo} \= \verb|\t{oo}|~~~ \=
+\t{oo} \= \verb|\t{oo}|~~~ \=
+\t{oo} \= \verb|\t{oo}|~~~ \=
+\t{oo} \= \verb|\t{oo}|~~~ \=
+\t{oo} \=                       \kill
+
+\a`{o} \> \verb|\`{o}|  \> \~{o}  \> \verb|\~{o}|  \> \v{o}  \> \verb|\v{o}| \>
+\c{o}  \> \verb|\c{o}|  \> \a'{o} \> \verb|\'{o}|  \\
+\a={o} \> \verb|\={o}|  \> \H{o}  \> \verb|\H{o}|  \> \d{o}  \> \verb|\d{o}| \>
+\^{o}  \> \verb|\^{o}|  \> \.{o}  \> \verb|\.{o}|  \\
+\t{oo} \> \verb|\t{oo}| \> \b{o}  \> \verb|\b{o}|  \\  \"{o} \> \verb|\"{o}| \>
+\u{o}  \> \verb|\u{o}|  \\
+\end{tabbing}\end{quote}
+
+A number of other symbols are available, and can be used by including the
+following commands:
+\begin{quote}\singlespace\begin{tabbing}
+
+\LaTeX~\= \verb|\copyright|~~~~ \= \LaTeX~\= \verb|\copyright|~~~~ \=
+\LaTeX~\=  \kill
+
+\dag       \> \verb|\dag|       \> \S     \> \verb|\S|     \>
+\copyright \> \verb|\copyright| \\
+\ddag      \> \verb|\ddag|      \> \P     \> \verb|\P|     \>
+\pounds    \> \verb|\pounds|    \\
+\oe        \> \verb|\oe|        \> \OE    \> \verb|\OE|    \>
+\ae        \> \verb|\AE|        \\
+\AE        \> \verb|\AE|        \> \aa    \> \verb|\aa|    \>
+\AA        \> \verb|\AA|        \\
+\o         \> \verb|\o|         \> \O     \> \verb|\O|     \>
+\l         \> \verb|\l|         \\
+\L         \> \verb|\E|         \> \ss    \> \verb|\ss|    \>
+?`         \> \verb|?`|         \\
+!`         \> \verb|!`|         \> \ldots \> \verb|\ldots| \>
+\LaTeX     \> \verb|\LaTeX|     \\
+\end{tabbing}\end{quote}
+There is also a \verb|\today| command that prints the current date. When you
+use these commands remember that \LaTeX{} will ignore any spaces that
+follow them, so that you can type `\verb|\pounds 20|' to get `\pounds 20'.
+However, if you type `\verb|LaTeX is wonderful|' you will get `\LaTeX is
+wonderful'---notice the lack of space after \LaTeX.
+To overcome this problem you can follow any of these commands by a
+pair of empty brackets and then any spaces that you wish to include,
+and you will see that
+\verb|\LaTeX{} really is wonderful!| (\LaTeX{} really is wonderful!).
+
+\section{Titles}\label{sec:title}
+
+Most documents have a title.  To title a \LaTeX{} document, you include the
+following commands in your document, usually just after
+\verb|begin{document}|.
+\begin{quote}\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\title{required title}
+\author{required author}
+\date{required date}
+\maketitle
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+If there are several authors, then their names should be separated by
+\verb|\and|; they can also be separated by \verb|\\| if you want them to be
+centred on different lines.  If the \verb|\date| command is left out, then the
+current date will be printed.
+\egstart
+\singlespace
+\begin{verbatim}
+\title{Essential \LaTeX}
+\author{J Warbrick \and An Other}
+\date{14th February 1988}
+\maketitle
+\end{verbatim}
+\egmid
+\begin{center}
+{\normalsize Essential \LaTeX}\\[4ex]
+J Warbrick\hspace{1em}A N Other\\[2ex]
+14th February 1988
+\end{center}
+\egend
+
+The exact appearance of the title varies depending on
+the document style.  In styles \fn{report} and \fn{book} the title appears on a
+page of its own. In the \fn{article} style it normally appears at the top
+of the first page, the style option \fn{titlepage} will alter this (see
+Section~\ref{sec:styles}).  In the \fn{withesis} style, the title is created on a
+seperate page in the format appropriate to a UW-Madison thesis or dissertation.
+
+\section{Errors}
+
+When you create a new input file for \LaTeX{} you will probably make mistakes.
+Everybody does, and it's nothing to be worried about.  As with most computer
+programs, there are two sorts of mistake that you can make: those that \LaTeX{}
+notices and those that it doesn't.  To take a rather silly example, since
+\LaTeX{} doesn't understand what you are saying it isn't going to be worried if
+you mis-spell some of the words in your text.  You will just have to accurately
+proof-read your printed output.  On the other hand, if you mis-spell one of
+the environment names in your file then \LaTeX won't know what you want it
+to do.
+
+When this sort of thing happens, \LaTeX{} prints an error message on your
+terminal screen and then stops and waits for you to take some action.
+Unfortunately, the error messages that it produces are rather user-unfriendly
+and a little frightening.  Nevertheless, if you know where to look they
+will probably tell you where the error is and went wrong.
+
+Consider what would happen if you mistyped \verb|\begin{itemize}| so that it
+became \break\verb|\begin{itemie}|.  When \LaTeX{} processes this instruction, it
+displays the following on your terminal:
+\begin{quote}\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+LaTeX error.  See LaTeX manual for explanation.
+              Type  H <return>  for immediate help.
+! Environment itemie undefined.
+\@latexerr ...for immediate help.}\errmessage {#1}
+                                                  \endgroup
+l.140 \begin{itemie}
+
+?
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+After typing the `?' \LaTeX{} stops and waits for you to tell it what to do.
+
+The first two lines of the message just tell you that the error was detected by
+\LaTeX{}. The third line, the one that starts `!' is the {\em error indicator}.
+ It
+tells you what the problem is, though until you have had some experience of
+\LaTeX{} this may not mean a lot to you.  In this case it is just telling you
+that it doesn't recognise an environment called \fn{itemie}.
+The next two lines tell you what
+\LaTeX{} was doing when it found the error, they are irrelevant at the moment
+and can be ignored. The final line is called the {\em error locator}, and is
+a copy of the line from your file that caused the problem.
+It start with a line number to help you to find it in your file, and
+if the error was in the middle of a line it will be shown
+broken at the point where \LaTeX{} realised that there was an error.  \LaTeX{}
+can sometimes pass the point where the real error is before discovering that
+something is wrong, but it doesn't usually get very far.
+
+At this point you could do several things.  If you knew enough about \LaTeX{}
+you might be able to fix the problem, or you could type `X' and press the
+return key to stop \LaTeX{} running while you go and correct the error.  The
+best thing to do, however, is just to press the return key.  This will allow
+\LaTeX{} to go on running as if nothing had happened.  If you have made one
+mistake, then you have probably made several and you may as well try to find
+them all in one go.  It's much more efficient to do it this way than to run
+\LaTeX{} over and over again fixing one error at a time. Don't worry about
+remembering what the errors were---a copy of all the error messages is being
+saved in a {\em log\/} file so that you can look at them afterwards.
+
+If you look at the line that caused the error it's normally obvious what the
+problem was.  If you can't work out what you problem is look at the hints
+below, and if they don't help consult Chapter~6 of the manual~\cite{lamport}.
+  It contains a
+list of all of the error messages that you are likely to encounter together with
+some hints as to what may have caused them.
+
+Some of the most common mistakes that cause errors are
+\begin{itemize}
+\item A mispelled command or environment name.
+\item Improperly matched `\verb|{|' and `\verb|}|'---remember that they should
+ always
+come in pairs.
+\item Trying to use one of the ten special characters \verb|# $ % & _ { } ~ ^|
+and \verb|\| as an ordinary printing symbol.
+\item A missing \verb|\end| command.
+\item A missing command argument (that's the bit enclosed in '\verb|{|' and
+`\verb|}|').
+\end{itemize}
+
+One error can get \LaTeX{} so confused that it reports a series of spurious
+errors as a result.  If you have an error that you understand, followed by a
+series that you don't, then try correcting the first error---the rest
+may vanish as if by magic.
+Sometimes \LaTeX{} may write a {\tt *} and stop without an error message.  This
+is normally caused by a missing \verb|\end{document}| command, but other errors
+can cause it.  If this happens type \verb|\stop| and press the return key.
+
+Finally, \LaTeX{} will sometimes print {\em warning\/} messages.  They report
+problems that were not bad enough to cause \LaTeX{} to stop processing, but
+nevertheless may require investigation.  The most common problems are
+`overfull' and `underfull' lines of text.  A message like:
+\begin{quote}\footnotesize\begin{verbatim}
+Overfull \hbox (10.58649pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 172--175
+[]\tenrm Mathematical for-mu-las may be dis-played. A dis-played
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+indicates that \LaTeX{} could not find a good place to break a line when laying
+out a paragraph.  As a result, it was forced to let the line stick out into the
+right-hand margin, in this case by 10.6 points.  Since a point is about 1/72nd
+of an inch this may be rather hard to see, but it will be there none the less.
+
+This particular problem happens because \LaTeX{} is rather fussy about line
+breaking, and it would rather generate a line that is too long than generate a
+paragraph that doesn't meet its high standards.  The simplest way around the
+problem is to enclose the entire offending paragraph between
+\verb|\begin{sloppypar}| and \verb|\end{sloppypar}| commands.  This tells
+\LaTeX{} that you are happy for it to break its own rules while it is working on
+that particular bit of text.
+
+Alternatively, messages about ``Underfull \verb|\hbox'es''| may appear.
+These are lines that had to have more space inserted between
+words than \LaTeX{} would have liked.  In general there is not much that you
+can do about these.  Your output will look fine, even if the line looks a bit
+stretched.  About the only thing you could do is to re-write the offending
+paragraph!
+
+\section{A Final Reminder}
+
+You now know enough \LaTeX{} to produce a wide range of documents.  But this
+document has only scratched the surface of the
+things that \LaTeX{} can do.  This entire document was itself produced with
+\LaTeX{} (with no sticking things in or clever use of a photocopier) and even
+it hasn't used all the features that it could.  From this you may get some
+feeling for the power that \LaTeX{} puts at your disposal.
+
+Please remember what was said in the introduction: if you {\bf do} have a
+complex document to produce then {\bf go and read the manual}.  You will be
+wasting your time if you rely only on what you have read here.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/fig2.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/fig2.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2f220e2fc3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/fig2.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,520 @@
+% GNUPLOT: LaTeX picture
+\setlength{\unitlength}{0.240900pt}
+\ifx\plotpoint\undefined\newsavebox{\plotpoint}\fi
+\sbox{\plotpoint}{\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.350pt}}%
+\begin{picture}(1500,900)(0,0)
+%\tenrm
+\sbox{\plotpoint}{\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.350pt}}%
+\put(264,158){\rule[-0.175pt]{282.335pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(264,158){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{151.526pt}}
+\put(264,158){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.818pt}{0.350pt}}
+%\put(242,158){\makebox(0,0)[r]{0}}
+\put(1416,158){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.818pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(264,284){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.818pt}{0.350pt}}
+%\put(242,284){\makebox(0,0)[r]{2}}
+\put(1416,284){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.818pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(264,410){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.818pt}{0.350pt}}
+%\put(242,410){\makebox(0,0)[r]{4}}
+\put(1416,410){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.818pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(264,535){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.818pt}{0.350pt}}
+%\put(242,535){\makebox(0,0)[r]{6}}
+\put(1416,535){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.818pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(264,661){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.818pt}{0.350pt}}
+%\put(242,661){\makebox(0,0)[r]{8}}
+\put(1416,661){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.818pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(264,787){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.818pt}{0.350pt}}
+%\put(242,787){\makebox(0,0)[r]{10}}
+\put(1416,787){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.818pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(264,158){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+%\put(264,113){\makebox(0,0){0}}
+\put(264,767){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+\put(411,158){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+%\put(411,113){\makebox(0,0){0.5}}
+\put(411,767){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+\put(557,158){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+%\put(557,113){\makebox(0,0){1}}
+\put(557,767){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+\put(704,158){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+%\put(704,113){\makebox(0,0){1.5}}
+\put(704,767){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+\put(850,158){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+%\put(850,113){\makebox(0,0){2}}
+\put(850,767){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+\put(997,158){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+%\put(997,113){\makebox(0,0){2.5}}
+\put(997,767){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+\put(1143,158){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+%\put(1143,113){\makebox(0,0){3}}
+\put(1143,767){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+\put(1290,158){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+%\put(1290,113){\makebox(0,0){3.5}}
+\put(1290,767){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+\put(1436,158){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+%\put(1436,113){\makebox(0,0){4}}
+\put(1436,767){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.818pt}}
+\put(264,158){\rule[-0.175pt]{282.335pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1436,158){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{151.526pt}}
+\put(264,787){\rule[-0.175pt]{282.335pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(100,472){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\shortstack{$\| u\|$}}}
+\put(850,68){\makebox(0,0){$\lambda$}}
+%\put(850,832){\makebox(0,0){plot}}
+\put(264,158){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{151.526pt}}
+%\put(1306,722){\makebox(0,0)[r]{}}
+%\put(1328,722){\rule[-0.175pt]{15.899pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(264,158){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(264,158){\rule[-0.175pt]{6.304pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(290,159){\rule[-0.175pt]{6.304pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(316,160){\rule[-0.175pt]{6.304pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(342,161){\rule[-0.175pt]{6.304pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(368,162){\rule[-0.175pt]{6.304pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(394,163){\rule[-0.175pt]{6.304pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(420,164){\rule[-0.175pt]{5.644pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(444,165){\rule[-0.175pt]{5.644pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(467,166){\rule[-0.175pt]{5.644pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(491,167){\rule[-0.175pt]{5.644pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(514,168){\rule[-0.175pt]{5.644pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(538,169){\rule[-0.175pt]{5.644pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(561,170){\rule[-0.175pt]{5.644pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(585,171){\rule[-0.175pt]{6.384pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(611,172){\rule[-0.175pt]{6.384pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(638,173){\rule[-0.175pt]{6.384pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(664,174){\rule[-0.175pt]{6.384pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(691,175){\rule[-0.175pt]{6.384pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(717,176){\rule[-0.175pt]{6.384pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(744,177){\rule[-0.175pt]{5.862pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(768,178){\rule[-0.175pt]{5.862pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(792,179){\rule[-0.175pt]{5.862pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(816,180){\rule[-0.175pt]{5.862pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(841,181){\rule[-0.175pt]{5.862pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(865,182){\rule[-0.175pt]{5.862pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(889,183){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.371pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(908,184){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.371pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(926,185){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.371pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(944,186){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.371pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(962,187){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.371pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(980,188){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.371pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(998,189){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.371pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1017,190){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.216pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1034,191){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.216pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1052,192){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.216pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1069,193){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.216pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1087,194){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.216pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1104,195){\rule[-0.175pt]{4.216pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1122,196){\rule[-0.175pt]{3.172pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1135,197){\rule[-0.175pt]{3.172pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1148,198){\rule[-0.175pt]{3.172pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1161,199){\rule[-0.175pt]{3.172pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1174,200){\rule[-0.175pt]{3.172pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1187,201){\rule[-0.175pt]{3.172pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1200,202){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.893pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1208,203){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.893pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1216,204){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.893pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1224,205){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.893pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1232,206){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.893pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1240,207){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.893pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1248,208){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.893pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1256,209){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.245pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1261,210){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.245pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1266,211){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.245pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1271,212){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.245pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1276,213){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.245pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1281,214){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.245pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1286,215){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1288,216){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1289,217){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1291,218){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1292,219){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1294,220){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1295,221){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1295,222){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.361pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1294,223){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.361pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1292,224){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.361pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1291,225){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.361pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1289,226){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.361pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1288,227){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.361pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1284,228){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.964pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1280,229){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.964pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1276,230){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.964pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1272,231){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.964pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1268,232){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.964pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1264,233){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.964pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1258,234){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.273pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1253,235){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.273pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1248,236){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.273pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1242,237){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.273pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1237,238){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.273pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1232,239){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.273pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1227,240){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.273pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1219,241){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.847pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1211,242){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.847pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1204,243){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.847pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1196,244){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.847pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1188,245){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.847pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1181,246){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.847pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1172,247){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.128pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1163,248){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.128pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1154,249){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.128pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1145,250){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.128pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1136,251){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.128pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1128,252){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.128pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1120,253){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.893pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1112,254){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.893pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1104,255){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.893pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1096,256){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.893pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1088,257){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.893pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1080,258){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.893pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1073,259){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.893pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1063,260){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.208pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1054,261){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.208pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1045,262){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.208pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1036,263){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.208pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1027,264){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.208pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1018,265){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.208pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1009,266){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.168pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1000,267){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.168pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(991,268){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.168pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(982,269){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.168pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(973,270){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.168pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(964,271){\rule[-0.175pt]{2.168pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(957,272){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.686pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(950,273){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.686pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(943,274){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.686pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(936,275){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.686pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(929,276){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.686pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(922,277){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.686pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(915,278){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.686pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(907,279){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.767pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(900,280){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.767pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(893,281){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.767pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(885,282){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.767pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(878,283){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.767pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(871,284){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.767pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(864,285){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.486pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(858,286){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.486pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(852,287){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.486pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(846,288){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.486pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(840,289){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.486pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(834,290){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.486pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(829,291){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.998pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(825,292){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.998pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(821,293){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.998pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(817,294){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.998pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(813,295){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.998pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(809,296){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.998pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(805,297){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.998pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(801,298){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.883pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(797,299){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.883pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(793,300){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.883pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(790,301){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.883pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(786,302){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.883pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(783,303){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.883pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(780,304){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(778,305){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(776,306){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(774,307){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(772,308){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(770,309){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(770,310){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(769,311){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(768,312){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(767,314){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(766,315){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(765,316){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.723pt}}
+\put(766,320){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.723pt}}
+\put(767,323){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(768,324){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(769,325){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(771,326){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(772,327){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(774,328){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(775,329){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(777,330){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.602pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(779,331){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.602pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(782,332){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.602pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(784,333){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.602pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(787,334){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.602pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(789,335){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.602pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(792,336){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.843pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(795,337){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.843pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(799,338){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.843pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(802,339){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.843pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(806,340){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.843pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(809,341){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.843pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(813,342){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.826pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(816,343){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.826pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(819,344){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.826pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(823,345){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.826pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(826,346){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.826pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(830,347){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.826pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(833,348){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.826pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(837,349){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.084pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(841,350){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.084pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(846,351){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.084pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(850,352){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.084pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(855,353){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.084pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(859,354){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.084pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(864,355){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.164pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(868,356){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.164pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(873,357){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.164pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(878,358){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.164pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(883,359){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.164pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(888,360){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.164pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(892,361){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.032pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(897,362){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.032pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(901,363){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.032pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(905,364){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.032pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(910,365){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.032pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(914,366){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.032pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(918,367){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.032pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(922,368){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.205pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(928,369){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.204pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(933,370){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.204pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(938,371){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.204pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(943,372){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.204pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(948,373){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.204pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(953,374){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.124pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(957,375){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.124pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(962,376){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.124pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(967,377){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.124pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(971,378){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.124pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(976,379){\rule[-0.175pt]{1.124pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(981,380){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.929pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(984,381){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.929pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(988,382){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.929pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(992,383){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.929pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(996,384){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.929pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1000,385){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.929pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1004,386){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.929pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1007,387){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.923pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1011,388){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.923pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1015,389){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.923pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1019,390){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.923pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1023,391){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.923pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1027,392){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.923pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1031,393){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.843pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1034,394){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.843pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1038,395){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.843pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1041,396){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.843pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1045,397){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.843pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1048,398){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.843pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1052,399){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.585pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1054,400){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.585pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1056,401){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.585pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1059,402){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.585pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1061,403){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.585pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1064,404){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.585pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1066,405){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.585pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1069,406){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1071,407){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1073,408){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1075,409){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1077,410){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1079,411){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1081,412){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.402pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1083,413){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.401pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1085,414){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.401pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1086,415){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.401pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1088,416){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.401pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1090,417){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.401pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1091,418){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1092,418){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1093,419){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1094,420){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1095,422){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1096,423){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1097,424){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.723pt}}
+\put(1098,428){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.723pt}}
+\put(1099,431){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{1.686pt}}
+\put(1098,438){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1097,439){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1096,440){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1095,441){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1094,442){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1091,444){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1090,445){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1089,446){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1088,447){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1087,448){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1086,449){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1084,450){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1083,451){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1081,452){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1080,453){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1078,454){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1077,455){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1076,456){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1074,457){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1072,458){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1070,459){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1068,460){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1066,461){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1065,462){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1063,463){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.482pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1061,464){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.482pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1059,465){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.482pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1057,466){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.482pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1055,467){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.482pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1053,468){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.482pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1051,469){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.482pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1049,470){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.482pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1047,471){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.482pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1045,472){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.482pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1043,473){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.482pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1041,474){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.482pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1039,475){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.482pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1036,476){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1034,477){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1032,478){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1030,479){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1028,480){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1026,481){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1023,482){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1021,483){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1019,484){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1017,485){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1015,486){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1013,487){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.522pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1011,488){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.447pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1009,489){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.447pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1007,490){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.447pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1005,491){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.447pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1003,492){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.447pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1001,493){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.447pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(1000,494){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.447pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(998,495){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(996,496){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(994,497){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(992,498){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(990,499){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(989,500){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(987,501){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(985,502){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(983,503){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(981,504){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(979,505){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(978,506){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.442pt}{0.350pt}}
+\put(976,507){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(975,508){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(974,509){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(972,510){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(971,511){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(970,512){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(969,513){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(967,514){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(966,515){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(965,516){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(964,517){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(963,518){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(962,519){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(962,520){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(961,521){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(960,522){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(959,524){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(958,525){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(957,527){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.361pt}}
+\put(956,528){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.361pt}}
+\put(955,530){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.361pt}}
+\put(954,531){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.361pt}}
+\put(953,533){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.723pt}}
+\put(952,536){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.723pt}}
+\put(951,539){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{1.686pt}}
+\put(950,546){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{1.445pt}}
+\put(951,552){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.482pt}}
+\put(952,554){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.482pt}}
+\put(953,556){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.482pt}}
+\put(954,558){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.562pt}}
+\put(955,560){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.562pt}}
+\put(956,562){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.562pt}}
+\put(957,564){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(958,566){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(959,567){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(960,568){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(961,569){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(962,571){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(963,572){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(964,573){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(965,574){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(966,575){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(967,577){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(968,578){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(969,579){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(970,580){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(971,581){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(972,582){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(973,584){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(974,585){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(975,586){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(976,587){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(977,588){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(978,589){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(979,590){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(980,591){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(981,592){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(982,593){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(983,594){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(984,595){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(985,596){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(986,597){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(987,598){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(988,600){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(989,601){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(990,603){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(991,604){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(992,605){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(993,606){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(994,607){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(995,608){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(996,609){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(997,610){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(998,611){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(999,612){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1000,613){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1001,615){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1002,616){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1003,617){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1004,619){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1005,620){\usebox{\plotpoint}}
+\put(1006,622){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.361pt}}
+\put(1007,623){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.361pt}}
+\put(1008,625){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.361pt}}
+\put(1009,626){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.361pt}}
+\put(1010,628){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.562pt}}
+\put(1011,630){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.562pt}}
+\put(1012,632){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.562pt}}
+\put(1013,634){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.723pt}}
+\put(1014,638){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.723pt}}
+\put(1015,641){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{1.445pt}}
+\put(1016,647){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{1.686pt}}
+\put(1017,654){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{3.734pt}}
+\put(1016,669){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.843pt}}
+\put(1015,673){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{1.445pt}}
+\put(1014,679){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.723pt}}
+\put(1013,682){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.723pt}}
+\put(1012,685){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.562pt}}
+\put(1011,687){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.562pt}}
+\put(1010,689){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.562pt}}
+\put(1009,691){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.723pt}}
+\put(1008,695){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.723pt}}
+\put(1007,698){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.482pt}}
+\put(1006,700){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.482pt}}
+\put(1005,702){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.482pt}}
+\put(1004,704){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.562pt}}
+\put(1003,706){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.562pt}}
+\put(1002,708){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.562pt}}
+\put(1001,710){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.723pt}}
+\put(1000,714){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.723pt}}
+\put(999,717){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.482pt}}
+\put(998,719){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.482pt}}
+\put(997,721){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.482pt}}
+\put(996,723){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.843pt}}
+\put(995,726){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.843pt}}
+\put(994,730){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.723pt}}
+\put(993,733){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.723pt}}
+\put(992,736){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.843pt}}
+\put(991,739){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{0.843pt}}
+\put(990,743){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{1.445pt}}
+\put(989,749){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{1.445pt}}
+\put(988,755){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{1.686pt}}
+\put(987,762){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{4.577pt}}
+\put(988,781){\rule[-0.175pt]{0.350pt}{1.445pt}}
+\end{picture}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/figs.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/figs.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..776db75b4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/figs.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+\chapter{Figures and Tables}\label{quad}
+This chapter\footnote{Most of the text in this chapter's introduction is from {\em How to
+\TeX{} a Thesis: The Purdue Thesis Styles}} shows some example ways of incorporating tables and figures into \LaTeX{}.
+Special environments exist for tables and figures and are special because they are
+allowed to {\em float}---that is, \LaTeX{} doesn't always put them in the exact place
+that they occur in your input file.  An algorithm is used to place the floating environments,
+or floats, at locations which are typographically correct.  This may cause endless frustration
+if you want to have a figure or table occur at a specific location.  There are a few
+methods for solving this.
+
+You can exert some influence on \LaTeX{}'s float placement algorithm by using
+{\em float position specifiers}.  These specifiers, listed below, tell \LaTeX{}
+what you prefer.
+\begin{tabbing}
+{\tt hhhhhh} \= ``bottom'' \=  \kill
+{\tt h}\> ``here'' \> do not move this object \\
+{\tt p}\> ``page'' \> put this object on a page of floats \\
+{\tt b}\> ``bottom'' \> put this object at the bottom of a page\\
+{\tt t}\> ``top'' \> put this object at the top of a page\\
+\end{tabbing}
+
+Any combination of these can be used:
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+ ...
+\caption{A Figure!}
+\end{figure}
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+
+In this example, we asked \LaTeX{} to ``put the figure `here' if possible.  If it
+is not possible (according to the rule encoded in the float algorithm), put it on the
+next float page.  A float page is a page which contains nothing but floating objects,
+{\em e.g.} a page of nothing but figures or tables.  If this isn't possible, try to put it
+at the `top' of a page.  The last thing to try is to put the figure at the `bottom' of
+a page.''
+
+The remainder of this chapter deals with some examples of what to put into the figure,
+the ellipsis (\ldots ) in the example above.
+
+\section{Tables}
+Table~\ref{pde.tab1} is an example table from the UW Math Department.
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\centering
+\caption{PDE solve times, $15^3+1$
+equations.\label{pde.tab1}}
+\begin{tabular}{||l|l|l|l|l|l||}\hline
+Precond. & Time & Nonlinear & Krylov
+& Function & Precond. \\
+ & & Iterations & Iterations & calls & solves \\ \hline
+None & 1260.9u & 3 & 26 & 30 & 0  \\
+ &(21:09) & & & &  \\ \hline
+FFT  & 983.4u & 2  & 5  & 8  & 7 \\
+&(16:31) & & & & \\ \hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+The code to generate it is as follows:
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\centering
+\caption{PDE solve times, $15^3+1$
+equations.\label{pde.tab1}}
+\begin{tabular}{||l|l|l|l|l|l||}\hline
+Precond. & Time & Nonlinear & Krylov
+& Function & Precond. \\
+ & & Iterations & Iterations & calls & solves \\ \hline
+None & 1260.9u & 3 & 26 & 30 & 0  \\
+ &(21:09) & & & &  \\ \hline
+FFT  & 983.4u & 2  & 5  & 8  & 7 \\
+&(16:31) & & & & \\ \hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+
+\section{Figures}
+There are many different ways to incorporate figures into a \LaTeX{}
+document.  \LaTeX{} has an internal {\tt picture} environment and
+some programs will generate files which are in this format and can
+be simply {\tt include}d.  In addition to \LaTeX{} native {\tt picture}
+format, additional packages can be loaded in the {\tt\verb|\documentstyle|}
+command (or using the {\tt input} command) to allow \LaTeX{} to process
+non-native formats such as PostScript.
+
+\subsection{\tt gnuplot}
+The graph of Figure~\ref{gelfand.fig2}
+ was created by gnuplot. For simple graphs this is a
+ great utility.  For example, if you want a sin curve in your thesis
+ try the following:
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+ (terminal window): gnuplot
+ (in gnuplot):
+                 set terminal latex
+                 set output "foo.tex"
+                 plot sin(x)
+                 quit
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+This will generate a file called {\tt foo.tex} which can be read in
+with the following statements.
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\centering
+\input{fig2.tex}
+\caption{Gelfand equation on the ball, $3\leq n \leq 9$.
+\label{gelfand.fig2}}
+\end{figure}
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\centering
+\input{fig2.tex}
+\caption{Gelfand equation on the ball, $3\leq n \leq 9$.
+\label{gelfand.fig2}}
+\end{figure}
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+One advantage to using the native \LaTeX{} {\tt picture} environment
+is that the fonts will be assured to agree and the pictures can be viewed
+in the {\tt .dvi} viewer.
+
+\subsection{PostScript}
+Many drawing applications now allow the export of a graphic to the
+{\em Encapsulated PostScript} format.  These files have a suffix of
+{\tt .EPS} or {\tt .EPSF} and are similar to a regular PostScript
+file except that they contain a {\em bounding box} which describes
+the dimensions of the figure.
+
+In order to include PostScript figures, the {\tt epsfig} (or {\tt psfig}
+depending on the system you are using) style file must be included in either
+the {\tt\verb|\documentstyle|} command or the preamble using the {\tt input} command.
+
+Figure~\ref{vwcontr} is a plot from Matlab.
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\centerline{
+\psfig{figure=vwcontr.eps,width=5in,angle=0}
+           }
+\caption{$\sigma$ as a Function of Voltage and Speed, $\alpha = 20$}
+\label{vwcontr}
+\end{figure}
+The commands to include this figure are
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\centerline{
+\psfig{figure=vwcontr.ps,width=5in,angle=0}
+           }
+\caption{$\sigma$ as a Function of Voltage and Speed, $\alpha = 20$}
+\label{vwcontr}
+\end{figure}
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+
+Observe that the {\tt \verb|\psfig|} command allows the scaling of the figure
+by setting either the {\tt width} or {\tt height} of the figure.  If only one
+dimension is specified, the other is computed to keep the same aspect ratio.
+The figure can also be rotated by setting {\tt angle} to the desired value in
+degrees.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/intro.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/intro.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5bf0dbe47f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/intro.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+% Pre-lim
+% by Eric Benedict
+
+
+\chapter{Introducing the {\tt withesis} \LaTeX{} Style Guide}
+This manual is was written to test the {\tt withesis} style
+file and to provide documentation for this style file.  
+
+\section{History}
+The
+idea for this came from a similar manual written by James Darrell
+McCauley and Scott Hucker in 1993 for the Purdue University thesis
+style file.  Content ideas were liberally borrowed from this document.
+The {\tt withesis} style file is based on the Purdue thesis file
+written by Dave Kraynie and edited by Darrell McCauley.  This base was
+edited to meet the format requirements of the University of 
+Wisconsin--Madison and several additional new commands were created.
+In addition, environments from the UW Mathematics Department were also
+incorporated.
+
+\section{Producing Your Thesis or Dissertation}
+The {\tt withesis} style file will take care of most of the formatting
+requirements for submitting your thesis or dissertation at the University
+of Wisconsin-Madison.  There are some requirements on the printing of your
+document.  From the Graduate School's {\em UW-Madison Guide To Preparing 
+Your Doctoral Dissertation},
+\begin{quote}\singlespace
+Print your dissertation on a laser printer. (Some high quality dot-matrix
+printers may be acceptable.) The printer must produce output that
+meets all format and legibility requirements. A professional copy shop
+can produce an acceptable copy to be submitted to the Graduate School.
+Some copiers enlarge the original between one and two percent. To avoid
+problems with margins, produce the original copy with margins larger than
+the required minimum. Look carefully at the copy before paying for the
+services and ask for pages to be recopied if necessary. Common flaws are:
+smudges, copy lines, specks, missing pages, margin shifts, slanting of
+the printed image on the page, and poor paper quality.
+\end{quote}
+
+\subsection{Required Paper}
+The paper which is used for PhD Dissertations should be:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item 8-1/2 x 11 inches
+\item High-quality, white
+\item 20 pound weight, bond
+\end{itemize}
+ 
+While for Masters Theses, the paper should be:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item 8-1/2 x 11 inches
+\item White
+\item Acid-free or pH neutral
+\item 20 pound weight
+\item 25\% cotton bond minimum
+\end{itemize}
+
+Paper that meets these requirements can be purchased at book and stationery
+stores.
+
+\subsection{Copyright Page}
+\label{copyright}
+If you choose to retain and register copyright of the dissertation, prepare
+a copyright page using the {\tt withesis} {\tt \verb|\copyrightpage|} command. 
+Center the text in the bottom third of the page within the dissertation
+margins. This page is not numbered. There is an additional fee for copyrighting
+your dissertation which is payable at the bursars office along with the
+microfilming and binding fee.
+
+\subsection{Prechecks}
+The Graduate School has reserved 9:00-9:30 each morning to answer specific formatting questions
+(for example: use of tables, graphs and charts). You may bring in 8-10
+pages to be reviewed. No appointment is necessary.
+
+\subsection{Final Checks}
+\sloppypar
+For information about the final Graduate School review and about depositing
+your dissertation in the library, see {\em The Three D's: Deadlines, Defending, 
+Depositing Your Doctoral Dissertation} or look
+at the web site 
+\begin{quote}
+{\tt http://www.wisc.edu/grad/gs/degrees/ddd.html}
+\end{quote}
+
+\section{Disclaimer}
+This software and documentation is provided ``as is'' without any
+express or implied warranty.
+While care has been taken by the authors of this style file such that the
+final product will probably meet the University of Wisconsin's formatting 
+requirements this is not guaranteed. 
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/main.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/main.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9973a587ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/main.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+% thesis.tex
+%
+% This file is root file for an example thesis written using the
+% University of Wisconsin-Madison LaTeX Style file.
+%
+% It is provided without warranty on an AS IS basis.
+
+
+%=====================================================================
+% Document Style
+%=====================================================================
+% Choose only one of the following document classes:
+%
+% for a 12 Point UW PhD Thesis without Margin Check
+\documentclass[12pt]{withesis}
+%
+% for a 10 Point UW PhD Thesis with Margin Check
+%\documentclass[10pt,margincheck]{withesis}
+%
+% The margincheck option flags lines which overflow their hbox with a black
+%  box at the end of the line.  This usually (but not always) indicates a
+%  margin violation on the right margin.  Left margin violations aren't
+%  indicated and if the margin violation is large enough, there isn't room
+%  for the black box to be visiable.  
+%
+% This option can be also used in conjunction with the msthesis option.
+%
+% or for a 12 Point UW Masters Thesis
+%\documentclass[12pt,msthesis]{withesis}
+%
+% or for a 10 Point UW Masters Thesis
+%\documentclass[10pt,msthesis]{withesis}
+%
+% The msthesis option changes the page margins from 1" all around
+% (the PhD format) to 1.25" left and 1" remaining margins (MS format).
+% The defaults for degree and thesis are changed to be MS and thesis.
+% These defaults can be overridden if the margins for the MS thesis
+% are desired for other documents.
+
+% To include optional packages, use the \usepackage command.
+%  The package epsfig is used to bring in the Encapsulated PostScript
+%    figures into the document.
+%  The package times is used to change the fonts to Times Roman; however
+%    because the times typewriter font looks odd, the original LaTeX
+%    Computer Modern font is kept for the typewriter font using
+%      \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{cmtt}
+%    Note that Times Roman is a PostScript font and therefore, the document
+%    cannot be correctly viewed from the *.dvi file.  It should be converted
+%    to a *.ps file first and then viewed with a PostScript previewer...
+\usepackage{epsfig}
+\usepackage{times}
+\renewcommand{\ttdefault}{cmtt}
+
+%========================================================================
+%  Draft Control Commands:
+%========================================================================
+%
+% \psdraft causes the \psfig or \epsfig commands to draw a box and label
+% the box with the postscript file name instead of reading in the full
+% postscript figure.  This can save time and toner when printing drafts.
+%
+%\psdraft
+%
+%
+% \psfull causes the inclusion of the postscript figures.
+%\psfull
+%
+%
+%\pagestyle{thesisdraft} causes the footer text to become:
+% DRAFT: Do Not Distribute        <time><Date>        <input file name>
+%
+%\pagestyle{thesisdraft}
+%
+%\pagestyle{thesis} causes the header and footers to be the correct format
+%
+\pagestyle{thesis}
+%
+%
+%  The page margins can be marked with a post-script box using the
+%  \draftmargins command.  This command uses dvips's end-of-page hook
+%  This is only visible in the *.ps file (NOT the *.dvi file)!
+%
+%\draftmargins
+%
+%
+%  The word ``DRAFT'' can be diagonally printed across the page using
+%  the \draftscreen command.  This command uses dvip's beginning-of-page
+%  hook.  This is only visible in the *.ps file (NOT the *.dvi file)!
+%
+%\draftscreen
+
+
+%=======================================================================
+% Remove the following lines if appendix tables or figures are present.
+% The suppress writing the auxiliary information which appears in the
+% list of tables or list of figures.
+%
+\noappendixtables                % Don't have appendix tables
+\noappendixfigures               % Don't have appendix figures
+
+
+%=======================================================================
+% End of Preamble, start of document
+%
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+% Choose your bibliography style
+% plain is the basic style, others include ieeetr, siam, asm, etc
+\bibliographystyle{plain}
+
+
+\include{prelude}                % Title page, abstract, table of contents, etc
+\include{intro}                  % Chapter 1
+\include{essentials}             % Edited ``Essential LaTeX'' by Jon Warbrick
+\include{figs}                   % Chapter 3 Edited from UW Math Dept's Sample Thesis
+\include{bibs}                   % Chapter 4 From PU Thesis styles, by J.D. McCauley
+\include{usage}                  % Chapter 5 Strongly based on similar by J.D. McCauley
+
+\bibliography{refs}              % Make the bibliography
+
+\begin{appendices}               % Start of the Appendix Chapters.  If there is only
+                                 % one Appendix Chapter, then use \begin{appendix}
+\include{code}                   % Including computer code listings
+\include{bibref}                 % a BibTeX reference
+\include{math}                   % Complex Equations from the UW Math Department
+\include{acro}                   % A discussion on generating PDF files.
+\end{appendices}                 % End of the Appendix Chapters.  ibid on \end{appendix}
+%\include{vita}                  % Optional Vita, use \begin{vita} vita text \end{vita}
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/math.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/math.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ac00cfea42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/math.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,237 @@
+\chapter{Mathematics Examples}
+This appendix provides an example of \LaTeX's typesetting
+capabilities.  Most of text was obtained from the University of
+Wisconsin-Madison Math Department's example thesis file.
+
+\section{Matrices}
+The equations for the {\em dq}-model of an induction machine in the
+synchronous reference frame are
+\begin{eqnarray}
+ \left[\begin{array}{c} v_{qs}^e\\v_{ds}^e\\v_{qr}^e\\v_{dr}^e  \end{array}\right]                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              
+ &=& \left[ \begin{array}{cccc}
+ r_s + x_s\frac{\rho}{\omega_b} & \frac{\omega_e}{\omega_b}x_s & x_m\frac{\rho}{\omega_b} & \frac{\omega_e}{\omega_b}x_m \\
+ -\frac{\omega_e}{\omega_b}x_s & r_s + x_s\frac{\rho}{\omega_b} & -\frac{\omega_e}{\omega_b}x_m & x_m\frac{\rho}{\omega_b} \\
+ x_m\frac{\rho}{\omega_b} & \frac{\omega_e -\omega_r}{\omega_b}x_m & r_r'+x_r'\frac{\rho}{\omega_b} & \frac{\omega_e - \omega_r}{\omega_b}x_r' \\
+ -\frac{\omega_e -\omega_r}{\omega_b}x_m & x_m\frac{\rho}{\omega_b} & -\frac{\omega_e - \omega_r}{\omega_b}x_r' & r_r' + x_r'\frac{\rho}{\omega_b}
+ \end{array} \right]
+ \left[\begin{array}{c} i_{qs}^e\\i_{ds}^e\\i_{qr}^e\\i_{dr}^e\end{array} \right] \label{volteq}\\
+ T_e&=&\frac{3}{2}\frac{P}{2}\frac{x_m}{\omega_b}\left(i_{qs}^ei_{dr}^e - i_{ds}^ei_{qr}^e\right) \label{torqueeq}\\
+ T_e-T_l&=&\frac{2J\omega_b}{P}\frac{d}{dt}\left(\frac{\omega_r}{\omega_b}\right) \label{mecheq}.
+\end{eqnarray}
+
+\section{Multi-line Equations}
+
+\LaTeX{} has a built-in equation array feature, however the
+equation numbers must be on the same line as an equation.  For example:
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\Delta u + \lambda e^u &= 0&u\in \Omega,  \nonumber \\
+u&=0&u\in\partial\Omega.
+\end{eqnarray}
+
+Alternatively, the number can be centered in the equation using the
+following method.
+%
+% The equation-array feature in LaTeX is a bad idea.  For centered
+% numbers you should set your own equations and arrays as follows:
+%
+\def\dd{\displaystyle}
+\begin{equation}\label{gelfand}
+\begin{array}{rl}
+\dd \Delta u + \lambda e^u = 0, &
+\dd u\in \Omega,\\[8pt] % add 8pt extra vertical space. 1 line=23pt
+\dd u=0, & \dd u\in\partial\Omega.
+\end{array}
+\end{equation}
+The previous equation had a label.  It may be referenced as
+equation~(\ref{gelfand}).
+
+
+\section{More Complicated Equations}
+\section*{Rellich's identity}\label{rellich.section}
+\setcounter{theorem}{0}
+%
+%
+
+Standard developments of Pohozaev's identity used an identity by
+Rellich~\cite{rellich:der40}, reproduced here.
+
+\begin{lemma}[Rellich]
+Given $L$ in divergence form and $a,d$ defined above, $u\in C^2
+(\Omega )$, we have
+\begin{equation}\label{rellich}
+\int_{\Omega}(-Lu)\nabla u\cdot (x-\overline{x})\, dx
+= (1-\frac{n}{2}) \int_{\Omega} a(\nabla u,\nabla u) \, dx
+-
+\frac{1}{2} \int_{\Omega}
+d(\nabla u, \nabla u) \, dx
+\end{equation}
+$$
++
+\frac{1}{2} \int_{\partial\Omega} a(\nabla u,\nabla u)(x-\overline{x})
+\cdot \nu  \, dS
+-
+\int_{\partial\Omega}
+a(\nabla u,\nu )\nabla u\cdot (x-\overline{x}) \, dS.
+$$
+\end{lemma}
+{\bf Proof:}\\
+There is no loss in generality to take $\overline{x} = 0$. First
+rewrite $L$:
+$$Lu = \frac{1}{2}\left[ \sum_{i}\sum_{j}
+\frac{\partial}{\partial x_i}
+\left( a_{ij} \frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j} \right) +
+\sum_{i}\sum_{j}
+\frac{\partial}{\partial x_i}
+\left( a_{ij} \frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j} \right)
+\right]$$
+Switching the order of summation on the second term and relabeling
+subscripts, $j \rightarrow i$ and $i \rightarrow j$, then using the fact
+that $a_{ij}(x)$ is a symmetric matrix,
+gives the symmetric form needed to derive Rellich's identity.
+\begin{equation}
+Lu = \frac{1}{2} \sum_{i,j}\left[
+\frac{\partial}{\partial x_i}
+\left( a_{ij} \frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j} \right) +
+\frac{\partial}{\partial x_j}
+\left( a_{ij} \frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i} \right)
+\right].
+\end{equation}
+
+Multiplying $-Lu$ by $\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_k} x_k$ and integrating
+over $\Omega$, yields
+$$\int_{\Omega}(-Lu)\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_k} x_k \, dx=
+-\frac{1}{2} \int_{\Omega}
+\sum_{i,j}\left[
+\frac{\partial}{\partial x_i}
+\left( a_{ij} \frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j} \right) +
+\frac{\partial}{\partial x_j}
+\left( a_{ij} \frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i} \right)
+\right]
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_k} x_k \, dx$$
+Integrating by parts (for integral theorems see~\cite[p. 20]
+{zeidler:nfa88IIa})
+gives
+$$= \frac{1}{2} \int_{\Omega}
+\sum_{i,j} a_{ij} \left[
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j}
+\frac{\partial^2 u}{\partial x_k\partial x_i} +
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i}
+\frac{\partial^2 u}{\partial x_k\partial x_j}
+\right] x_k \, dx
+$$
+$$
++
+\frac{1}{2} \int_{\Omega}
+\sum_{i,j} a_{ij} \left[
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j} \delta_{ik} +
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i} \delta_{jk}
+\right] \frac{\partial u}{\partial x_k} \, dx
+$$
+$$- \frac{1}{2} \int_{\partial\Omega}
+\sum_{i,j} a_{ij} \left[
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j} \nu_{i} +
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i} \nu_{j}
+\right] \frac{\partial u}{\partial x_k} x_k \, dx
+$$
+= $I_1 + I_2 + I_3$, where the unit normal vector is $\nu$.
+One may rewrite $I_1$ as
+$$I_1 = \frac{1}{2} \int_{\Omega}
+\sum_{i,j} a_{ij} \frac{\partial}{\partial x_k}\left(
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i}
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j}
+\right) x_k \, dx
+$$
+Integrating the first term by parts again yields
+$$I_1 = -\frac{1}{2} \int_{\Omega}
+\sum_{i,j} a_{ij} \left(
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i}
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j}
+\right) \, dx
++
+\frac{1}{2} \int_{\partial\Omega}
+\sum_{i,j} a_{ij} \left(
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i}
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j}
+\right) x_k \nu_k \, dS
+$$
+$$
+-
+\frac{1}{2} \int_{\Omega}
+\sum_{i,j} \left(
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i}
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j}
+\right) x_k \frac{\partial a_{ij}}{\partial x_k}\, dx.
+$$
+Summing over $k$ gives
+$$\int_{\Omega}(-Lu)(\nabla u\cdot x)\, dx =
+-\frac{n}{2} \int_{\Omega}
+\sum_{i,j} a_{ij} \left(
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i}
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j}
+\right) \, dx
+$$
+$$
++
+\frac{1}{2} \int_{\partial\Omega}
+\sum_{i,j} a_{ij} \left(
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i}
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j}
+\right) (x\cdot \nu ) \, dS
+-
+\frac{1}{2} \int_{\Omega}
+\sum_{i,j} \left(
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i}
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j}
+\right) (x\cdot  \nabla a_{ij}) \, dx
+$$
+$$
++
+\frac{1}{2} \int_{\Omega}
+\sum_{i,j,k} a_{ij} \left[
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j}
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_k} \delta_{ik} +
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i}
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_k} \delta_{jk}
+\right] \, dx
+$$
+$$- \frac{1}{2} \int_{\partial\Omega}
+\sum_{i,j} a_{ij} \left[
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j} \nu_{i} +
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i} \nu_{j}
+\right] (\nabla u\cdot x) \, dS.
+$$
+Combining the first and fourth term on the right-hand side
+simplifies the expression
+$$\int_{\Omega}(-Lu)(\nabla u\cdot x)\, dx
+=
+(1-\frac{n}{2}) \int_{\Omega}
+\sum_{i,j} a_{ij} \left(
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i}
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j}
+\right) \, dx
+$$
+$$
++
+\frac{1}{2} \int_{\partial\Omega}
+\sum_{i,j} a_{ij} \left(
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i}
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j}
+\right) (x\cdot \nu ) \, dS
+-
+\frac{1}{2} \int_{\Omega}
+\sum_{i,j} \left(
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i}
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j}
+\right) (x\cdot  \nabla a_{ij}) \, dx
+$$
+$$
+-
+\frac{1}{2} \int_{\partial\Omega}
+\sum_{i,j} a_{ij} \left[
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_j} \nu_{i} +
+\frac{\partial u}{\partial x_i} \nu_{j}
+\right] (\nabla u\cdot x) \, dS.
+$$
+Using the notation defined above, the result follows.
+
+
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/prelude.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/prelude.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1a0478c00d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/prelude.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+% prelude.tex
+%   - titlepage
+%   - dedication
+%   - acknowledgments
+%   - table of contents, list of tables and list of figures
+%   - nomenclature
+%   - abstract
+%============================================================================
+
+
+\clearpage\pagenumbering{roman}  % This makes the page numbers Roman (i, ii, etc)
+
+
+
+% TITLE PAGE
+%   - define \title{} \author{} \date{}
+\title{How to \LaTeX\ a Thesis}
+\author{Eric R. L. Benedict}
+\date{2000}
+%   - The default degree is ``Doctor of Philosophy''
+%     (unless the document style msthesis is specified
+%      and then the default degree is ``Master of Science'')
+%     Degree can be changed using the command \degree{}
+\degree{Master \TeX nician}
+%   - The default is dissertation, unless the document style
+%     msthesis was specified in which case it becomes thesis.
+%     If msthesis is specified for the MS margins, you can
+%     still have a dissertation if you specify \disseration
+%\disseration
+%   - for a masters project report, specify \project
+%\project
+%   - for a preliminary report, specify \prelim
+\prelim
+%   - for a masters thesis, specify \thesis
+%\thesis
+%   - The default department is ``Electrical Engineering''
+%     The department can be changed using the command \department{}
+%\department{New Department}
+%   - once the above are defined, use \maketitle to generate the titlepage
+\maketitle
+
+% COPYRIGHT PAGE
+%   - To include a copyright page use \copyrightpage
+\copyrightpage
+
+% DEDICATION
+\begin{dedication}
+To my pet rock, Skippy.
+\end{dedication}
+
+% ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
+\begin{acknowledgments}
+I thank the many people who have done lots of nice things for me.
+\end{acknowledgments}
+
+% CONTENTS, TABLES, FIGURES
+\tableofcontents
+\listoftables
+\listoffigures
+
+% NOMENCLATURE
+\begin{nomenclature}
+\begin{description}
+\item{\makebox[0.75in][l]{\TeX}}
+       \parbox[t]{5in}{a typesetting system by Donald Knuth~\cite{knuth}.  It
+       also refers to the ``plain'' format.  The proper pronounciation
+       rhymes with ``heck'' and ``peck'' and does not sound like
+       ``hex'' or ``Rex.''\\}
+
+\item{\makebox[0.75in][l]{\LaTeX}}  
+        \parbox[t]{5in}{a set of \TeX{} macros originally written by Leslie 
+        Lamport~\cite{lamport}.  The proper pronunciation is 
+        {\tt l\={a}$\cdot$tek'} and not {\tt l\={a}'$\cdot$teks} (see above).\\}
+
+\item{\makebox[0.75in][l]{{\sc Bib}\TeX}} 
+         \parbox[t]{5in}{a bibliography generation program by Oren 
+                Patashnik~\cite{lamport}
+                that can be used with either plain \TeX{} or \LaTeX{}.\\}
+
+\item{\makebox[0.75in][l]{$C_1$}} Constant 1
+
+\item{\makebox[0.75in][l]{$V$}}    Voltage 
+
+\item{\makebox[0.75in][l]{\$}}     US Dollars
+\end{description}
+\end{nomenclature}
+
+
+\advisorname{Bucky J. Badger}
+\advisortitle{Assistant Professor}
+% ABSTRACT
+\begin{umiabstract}
+  \input{abstract}
+\end{umiabstract}
+
+\begin{abstract}
+  \input{abstract}
+\end{abstract}
+
+
+\clearpage\pagenumbering{arabic} % This makes the page numbers Arabic (1, 2, etc)
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/refs.bib b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/refs.bib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ba3bede53e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/refs.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+@Article{rellich:der40,

+  author =       "F. Rellich",

+  title =        "Darstellung der {E}igenwerte von {$\Delta u + \lambda

+                 u = 0$} durch ein {R}andintegral",

+  journal =      "Math Z.",

+  year =         "1940",

+  volume =       "46",

+  pages =        "635--636",

+  annote =       "rellich identity",

+}

+

+@Book{zeidler:nfa88IIa,

+  author =       "E. Zeidler",

+  title =        "Nonlinear {F}unctional {A}nalysis",

+  publisher =    "Springer Verlag",

+  year =         "1988",

+  volume =       "IIa",

+  address =      "New York",

+  annote =       "BIF",

+}

+

+@book{ lamport ,

+     author =    "Leslie Lamport" ,

+     title =     "\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System" ,

+     publisher = "Addison--Wesley Pub.\ Co." ,

+     year =      "1986" ,

+     address =   "Reading, MA"

+}

+@book{ knuth ,

+     author =    "Donald E. Knuth" ,

+     title =     "The \TeX book" ,

+     publisher = "Addison--Wesley Pub.\ Co." ,

+     year =      "1984" ,

+     address =   "Reading, MA"

+}

+

+@book{ goossens ,

+     author =    "Michel Goossens and Frank Mittelbach and Alexander Samarin" ,

+     title =     "The \LaTeX Companion" ,

+     publisher = "Addison--Wesley Pub.\ Co." ,

+     year =      "1994" ,

+     address =   "Reading, MA"

+}

diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/usage.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/usage.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..991376d970
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/usage.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,377 @@
+% usage.tex
+%
+% This file explains how to use the withesis style
+%   it is heavily modelled after a similar chapter by McCauley
+%   for the Purdue Thesis style
+%
+% Eric Benedict, May 2000
+%
+% It is provided without warranty on an AS IS basis.
+
+
+\chapter{Using the {\tt withesis} Style}
+
+You can get a copy of the \LaTeX{} style for creating a University
+of Wisconsin--Madison thesis or dissertation from:
+
+{\tt http://www.cae.wisc.edu/\verb+~+benedict/LaTeX.html}
+
+After somehow unpacking it, you will have the style files ({\tt withesis.sty}
+{\tt withe10.sty}, and {\tt withe12.sty}) as well the files used to create
+this document.  The files used for this document can be copied and used as a
+template for your own thesis or dissertation.
+
+The final printed form of this document is useful, but the
+combination of the source code and final copy form a much more valuable
+reference.  Keeping a working copy of the this document can be helpful
+when you are later working on your thesis or disseration and want to know
+how to do something.  If you find a similar example in this document,
+then you can simply look at the corresponding source code and add it to
+your document.    Because many parts of this document were written by
+different people, the styles and techniques are also different and provide
+different ways of achieving the same or similar results.
+
+Because of the typical size of theses, it makes sense to break the document
+up into several smaller files.  Usually this is done at the chapter level.
+These files can then be {\tt \verb|\include|}d in a {\em root} file.  It is
+the {\em root} file that you will run \LaTeX{} on.  For this manual, the
+root file is called {\tt main.tex}.
+
+\section{The Root File and the Preamble}
+The {\tt \verb|\documentclass|} command is used to tell \LaTeX{} that you will
+be using the {\tt withesis} document class and it is the first command in your
+root file.  Class options such as {\tt 10pt}, {\tt 12pt}, {\tt msthesis} or
+{\tt margincheck} are specified here:
+
+{\tt \verb|\documentclass[12pt,msthesis]{withesis}|}
+
+The class option {\tt msthesis} sets the margins to be appropriate for depositing
+with the UW library, namely a 1.25 inch left margin with the remaining margins 1 inch.
+The defaults for the title page are also defined for a thesis and for a Master of
+Science degree.
+
+The class option {\tt margincheck} will place a small black square at the end of
+each line which exceeds the margins.\footnote{In reality, the square is
+placed at the end of lines which exceed their {\tt \char92hbox}.  This usually
+(but not always) indicates a  margin violation on the right margin.  Left
+margin violations aren't indicated and if the margin violation is large enough,
+there isn't room for the black box to be visiable.}  This is visible both in the {\tt .dvi} file
+as well as in the {\tt .ps} file.
+
+The area immediately following this command is called the {\em preamble} and is
+used for things like including different style packages,
+defining new macros and declaring the page style.
+
+The style packages can be used to easily change the thesis font.  For example,
+this document is set in Times Roman instead of the \LaTeX default of Computer
+Modern.  This change was performed by including the {\tt times} package:
+
+{\tt\verb|\usepackage{times}|}\footnote{In this document, the typewriter font
+{\tt $\backslash$tt} was redefined to use the Computer Modern font with the command
+{\tt $\backslash$renewcommand\{$\backslash$ttdefault\}\{cmtt\}}.  
+For more information, see~\cite{goossens}.}
+
+Remember that if you change the fonts from the default Computer Modern to
+PostScript ({\em e.g.} Times Roman) then in order to correctly see the
+document, you will need to convert the {\tt *.dvi} output into a {\tt *.ps}
+file and view the document with a PostScript viewer. This is required since 
+most {\tt *.dvi} previewer programs cannot 
+display PostScript fonts.  Usually, the previewer will substitute
+default fonts so the document may be viewed; however, since the alternate
+fonts may not be the same size, the formatting of the document may appear
+to be incorrect.
+
+The style package for including Postscript figures, {\tt epsfig}, is included with
+
+{\tt\verb|\usepackage{epsfig}|}
+
+If multiple style packages are required, then they can be combined into one statement
+as follows:
+
+{\tt\verb|\usepackage{epsfig,times}|}
+
+Many different style packages are available.  For more information, see~\cite{goossens}.
+
+The page styles are defined using a similar method.
+A special style is defined for the {\tt withesis} style:
+
+{\tt\verb|\pagestyle{thesisdraft}|}
+
+This style causes the footer text to become:
+
+{\verb| DRAFT: Do Not Distribute        <time><Date>        <input file name>|}
+
+This appears at the bottom of every page.
+
+In addition to the page style command, the {\tt withesis} has defined several useful
+commands which are specified in the preamble.  They include {\tt \verb| \draftmargin|},
+{\tt \verb|\draftscreen|}, {\tt \verb|\noappendixtables|}, and
+{\tt \verb|\noappendixfigures|}.
+
+The command  {\tt \verb|\draftmargin|} draws a PostScript box with the dimensions of
+the margins.  This makes it easy to check that the margins are correct and to see if
+any of the text or figures are outside of the required margins.  This box is only visible
+in the {\tt .ps} file since it is a PostScript special.
+
+
+The command  {\tt \verb|\draftscreen|} draws a PostScript screen with the word {\em DRAFT}
+in light grey and diagonally across the page.  This screen is only visible
+in the {\tt .ps} file since it is a PostScript special.
+
+The commands {\tt \verb|\noappendixtables|} and/or {\tt \verb|\noappendixfigures|} should
+be used if the appendix does not have either tables or figures respectively.  These commands
+inhibit the Appendix Table or Appendix Figure titles in the List of Tables or List of
+Figures.\label{usage:noapp}
+
+
+If you have specified the {\tt psfig} or {\tt epsfig} document style package, then a useful
+command is {\tt \verb|\psdraft|}.  This command will show the bounding box that the figure
+would occupy (instead of actually including the figure).  This speeds up the draft copy
+printing, reduces toner usage and the drawn box is visible in the {\tt .dvi} file.
+
+The next usual command is {\tt \verb|\begin{document}|}.  The following example is part
+of the root file used for this manual.
+
+\begin{quote} \singlespace\footnotesize\tt
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibliographystyle{plain}
+\include{prelude}        % Title page, abstract, table of contents, etc
+\include{intro}          % Chapter 1
+\include{essentials}     % Edited ``Essential LaTeX'' by Jon Warbrick
+\include{figs}           % Chapter 3 Edited from UW Math Dept's Sample Thesis
+\include{bibs}           % Chapter 4 From PU Thesis styles, by J.D. McCauley
+\include{usage}          % Chapter 5 Strongly based on similar by J.D. McCauley
+\bibliography{refs}      % Make the bibliography
+\begin{appendices}       % Start of the Appendix Chapters.  If there is only
+                         % one Appendix Chapter, then use \begin{appendix}
+\include{code}         % Including computer code listings
+\include{bibref}         % a BibTeX reference
+\include{math}           % Complex Equations from the UW Math Department
+\include{acro}           % A discussion on generating PDF files.
+\end{appendices}         % End of the Appendix Chapters.  ibid on \end{appendix}
+%\include{vita}          % Optional Vita, use \begin{vita} vita text \end{vita}
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+\section{Prelude}
+After the {\tt \verb|\begin{document}|} comes the preliminary information found in
+theses.  In this manual, the information is kept in the file {\tt prelude.tex} (see
+above).  These pages will need to be numbered with roman numerals, so use
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\clearpage\pagenumbering{roman}
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+
+Next, comes your thesis or dissertation title, your name, date of graduation, department
+and degree.
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\title{How to \LaTeX\ a Thesis}
+\author{Eric R. Benedict}
+\date{2000}
+%   - The default degree is ``Doctor of Philosophy''
+%     Degree can be changed using the command \degree{}
+%\degree{New Degree}
+%   - for a PhD dissertation (default), specify \dissertation
+%\dissertation
+%   - for a masters project report, specify \project
+%\project
+%   - for a preliminary report, specify \prelim
+%\prelim
+%   - for a masters thesis, specify \thesis
+%\thesis
+%   - The default department is ``Electrical Engineering''
+%     The department can be changed using the command \department{}
+%\department{New Department}
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+
+If you specified the class option {\tt msthesis}, then the degree is changed to
+{\em Master \break of Science} and the {\tt \verb|\thesis|} option is specified.  If you
+want to have the masters margins with another document, then the {\tt \verb|\degree|}
+and {\tt \verb|\dissertation|},  {\tt \verb|\project|}, {\em etc.\/} can be specified
+as needed.
+
+Once the
+above are all defined, use  {\tt \verb|\maketitle|} to generate the title page.
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\maketitle
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+
+If you wish to include a copyright page (see Section~\ref{copyright} for
+information on registering the copyright.), then add the command
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\copyrightpage
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+This will generate the proper copyright page and will use the name and date specified
+in {\tt \verb|\author{}|} and {\tt \verb|\date{}|}.
+
+Next are the dedications and acknowledgements:
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{dedication}
+To my pet rock, Skippy.
+\end{dedication}
+
+\begin{acknowledgments}
+I thank the many people who have done lots of nice things for me.
+\end{acknowledgments}
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+
+You must tell \LaTeX{} to generate a table of contents, a list of tables and a list of
+figures:
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\tableofcontents
+\listoftables
+\listoffigures
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+
+If you wish to have a nomenclature, list of symbols or glossary it can go here.
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{nomenclature}
+%\begin{listofsymbols}
+%\begin{glossary}
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+$C_1$ & Constant 1\\
+\ldots
+\end{tabular}
+%\end{glossary}
+%\end{listofsymbols}
+\end{nomenclature}
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+
+If your abstract will be microfilmed by Bell and Howell (formerly UMI), then you
+will need to generate an abstract of less than 350 words.  This abstract can be created
+using the {\tt umiabstract} environment.  This environment requires that you define your
+advisor and your advisor's title using {\tt \verb|\advisorname{}|} and
+{\tt \verb|\advisortitle{}|}.
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\advisorname{Bucky J. Badger}
+\advisortitle{Assistant Professor}
+% ABSTRACT
+\begin{umiabstract}
+\noindent       % Don't indent first paragraph.
+This explains the basics for using \LaTeX\ to typeset a
+dissertation, thesis or project report for the University of
+Wisconsin-Madison.
+
+...
+
+\end{umiabstract}
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+This will place your name, title and required text at the top of the page and follow the
+abstract text with your advisor's name at the bottom for your advisor's signature.  This
+page is not numbered and would be submitted separately.
+
+If you will have an abstract as part of your document, then the {\tt abstract} environment
+should be used.
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{abstract}
+\noindent       % Don't indent first paragraph.
+This explains the basics for using \LaTeX\ to typeset a
+dissertation, thesis or project report for the University of
+Wisconsin-Madison.
+
+...
+
+\end{abstract}
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+This will generate a page number and it will be included in the Table
+of Contents.  
+
+If you will have both the UMI and regular abstracts like this document, then
+you will probably want to write the abstract once and save it in a seperate
+file such as {\tt abstract.tex}.  Then, you can use the same abstract for
+both purposes.
+
+\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{umiabstract}
+  \input{abstract}
+\end{umiabstract}
+
+\begin{abstract}
+  \input{abstract}
+\end{abstract}
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+
+Finally, the page numbers must be changed to arabic numbers to conclude the preliminary
+portion of the document.
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\clearpage\pagenumbering{arabic}
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+
+\section{The Body}
+At the beginning of {\tt intro.tex} there is the following command:
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\chapter{Introducing the {\tt withesis} \LaTeX{} Style Guide}
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+Following that is the text of the chapter.  The body of your thesis is separated by
+sectioning commands like {\tt \verb|\chapter{}|}.  For more information on the sectioning
+commands, see Section~\ref{ess:sectioning}.
+
+Remember the basic rule of outlining you learned in grammar school:
+\begin{quote}
+You cannot have an `A' if you do not have a `B'
+\end{quote}
+Take care to have at least two {\tt \verb|\section|}s if you use the command; have
+two {\tt \verb|\subsection|}s, {\em etc}.
+
+
+
+\section{Additional Theorem Like Environments}
+The {\tt withesis} style adds numerous additional theorem like environments.  These
+environments were included to allow compatibility with the University of Wisconsin's
+Math Department's style file.  These environments are
+{\tt theorem}, {\tt assertion}, {\tt claim}, {\tt conjecture}, {\tt corollary},
+{\tt definition}, {\tt example}, {\tt figger}, {\tt lemma}, {\tt prop} and {\tt remark}.
+
+As an example, consider the following.
+\begin{lemma}
+Assuming that $\partial\Omega_2 = \emptyset$ and that $h(t) = 1$, we
+have $$
+\begin{array}{lr}
+\Delta u = f, &  x\in\Omega ,\\[2pt]
+u =  g_1, &  x\in\partial\Omega .
+\end{array}
+$$
+\end{lemma}
+which was produced with the following:
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{lemma}
+Assuming that $\partial\Omega_2 = \emptyset$ and that $h(t) = 1$, we
+have $$
+\begin{array}{lr}
+\Delta u = f, &  x\in\Omega ,\\[2pt]
+ u =  g_1, &  x\in\partial\Omega .
+\end{array}
+$$
+\end{lemma}
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+
+\section{Bibliography or References}
+As a final note, the default title for the references chapter is ``LIST OF REFERENCES.''
+Since some people may prefer ``BIBLIOGRAPHY'', the command
+\break{\tt \verb|\altbibtitle|}
+has been added to change the chapter title.
+
+\section{Appendices}
+There are two commands which are available to suppress the writing of the auxiliary information
+(to the {\tt .lot} and {\tt .lof} files).  They are:
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\begin{verbatim}
+\noappendixtables                % Don't have appendix tables
+\noappendixfigures               % Don't have appendix figures
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+These commands should be in the preamble.  See Section~\ref{usage:noapp}.
+
+There are two environments for doing the appendix chapter: {\tt appendix} and
+\break {\tt appendices}.  If you have only one chapter in the appendix, use the {\tt appendix}
+environment.  If you have more than one chapter, like this manual, use the
+{\tt appendices} environment.
+\begin{quote}\tt\singlespace\footnotesize\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{appendices}  % Start of the Appendix Chapters.  If there is only
+                    % one Appendix Chapter, then use \begin{appendix}
+\include{code}      % Including computer code listings
+\include{bibref}    % a BibTeX reference
+\include{math}      % Complex Equations from the UW Math Department
+
+\end{appendices}    % End of the Appendix Chapters. ibid on \end{appendix}
+\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
+The difference between these two environments is the way that the chapter header is
+created and how this is listed in the table of contents.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/vwcontr.eps b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/vwcontr.eps
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d6ee3b8818
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/vwcontr.eps
@@ -0,0 +1,4354 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-2.0 EPSF-1.2
+%%Creator: MATLAB, The Mathworks, Inc.
+%%Title: plot.eps
+%%CreationDate: 09/02/96  18:47:28
+%%DocumentNeededFonts: Helvetica
+%%DocumentProcessColors: Cyan Magenta Yellow Black
+%%Pages: 1
+%%BoundingBox:    54   201   555   604
+%%EndComments
+
+%%BeginProlog
+
+% MathWorks dictionary
+/MathWorks 150 dict begin
+
+% definition operators
+/bdef {bind def} bind def
+/ldef {load def} bind def
+/xdef {exch def} bdef
+/xstore {exch store} bdef
+
+% operator abbreviations
+/c  /clip ldef
+/cc /concat ldef
+/cp /closepath ldef
+/gr /grestore ldef
+/gs /gsave ldef
+/mt /moveto ldef
+/np /newpath ldef
+/cm /currentmatrix ldef
+/sm /setmatrix ldef
+/rc {rectclip} bdef
+/rf {rectfill} bdef
+/rm /rmoveto ldef
+/rl /rlineto ldef
+/s /show ldef
+/sc {setcmykcolor} bdef
+/sr /setrgbcolor ldef
+/w /setlinewidth ldef
+/j /setlinejoin ldef
+/cap /setlinecap ldef
+
+% page state control
+/pgsv () def
+/bpage {/pgsv save def} bdef
+/epage {pgsv restore} bdef
+/bplot /gsave ldef
+/eplot {stroke grestore} bdef
+
+% orientation switch
+/portraitMode 	0 def
+/landscapeMode 	1 def
+
+% coordinate system mappings
+/dpi2point 0 def
+
+% font control
+/FontSize 0 def
+/FMS {
+	/FontSize xstore		%save size off stack
+	findfont
+	[FontSize 0 0 FontSize neg 0 0]
+	makefont
+	setfont
+	}bdef
+
+/reencode {
+exch dup where
+{pop load} {pop StandardEncoding} ifelse
+exch
+dup 3 1 roll
+findfont dup length dict begin
+  { 1 index /FID ne {def}{pop pop} ifelse } forall
+  /Encoding exch def
+  currentdict
+end
+definefont pop
+} bdef
+
+/isroman {
+findfont /CharStrings get
+/Agrave known
+} bdef
+
+/FMSR {
+3 1 roll 1 index
+dup isroman
+{reencode} {pop pop} ifelse
+exch FMS
+} bdef
+
+/csm {
+	1 dpi2point div -1 dpi2point div scale
+	neg translate
+	landscapeMode eq {90 rotate} if
+	} bdef
+
+% line types: solid, dotted, dashed, dotdash
+/SO { [] 0 setdash } bdef
+/DO { [.5 dpi2point mul 4 dpi2point mul] 0 setdash } bdef
+/DA { [6 dpi2point mul] 0 setdash } bdef
+/DD { [.5 dpi2point mul 4 dpi2point mul 6 dpi2point mul 4 dpi2point mul] 0 setdash } bdef
+
+% macros for lines and objects
+/L {
+	lineto
+	stroke
+	} bdef
+/MP {
+	3 1 roll moveto
+	1 sub {rlineto} repeat
+	} bdef
+/AP {
+	{rlineto} repeat
+	} bdef
+/PP {
+	closepath fill
+	} bdef
+/DP {
+	closepath stroke
+	} bdef
+/MR {
+	4 -2 roll moveto
+	dup  0 exch rlineto
+	exch 0 rlineto
+	neg  0 exch rlineto
+	closepath
+	} bdef
+/FR {
+	MR stroke
+	} bdef
+/PR {
+	MR fill
+	} bdef
+/L1i {
+	{ currentfile picstr readhexstring pop } image
+	} bdef
+
+/tMatrix matrix def
+/MakeOval {
+	newpath
+	tMatrix currentmatrix pop
+	translate scale
+	0 0 1 0 360 arc
+	tMatrix setmatrix
+	} bdef
+/FO {
+	MakeOval
+	stroke
+	} bdef
+/PO {
+	MakeOval
+	fill
+	} bdef
+
+/PD {
+	2 copy moveto lineto stroke
+	} bdef
+
+
+currentdict end def
+%%EndProlog
+
+%%BeginSetup
+MathWorks begin
+
+0 cap
+
+end
+%%EndSetup
+
+%%Page: 1 1
+%%BeginPageSetup
+%%PageBoundingBox:    54   201   555   604
+MathWorks begin
+bpage
+%%EndPageSetup
+
+%%BeginObject: graph1 1
+bplot
+
+/dpi2point 12 def
+portraitMode 0216 7344 csm
+
+  443    91  6006  4839 MR c np
+76 dict begin %Colortable dictionary
+/c0 { 0 0 0 sr} bdef
+/c1 { 1 1 1 sr} bdef
+/c2 { 1 0 0 sr} bdef
+/c3 { 0 1 0 sr} bdef
+/c4 { 0 0 1 sr} bdef
+/c5 { 1 1 0 sr} bdef
+/c6 { 1 0 1 sr} bdef
+/c7 { 0 1 1 sr} bdef
+%%IncludeResource: font Helvetica
+/Helvetica /ISOLatin1Encoding 144 FMSR
+
+1 j
+c1
+   0    0 6912 5184 PR
+6 w
+DO
+4 w
+c0
+3519 4532 mt 1193 3463 L
+1193 3463 mt 1193 1128 L
+4153 4360 mt 1828 3291 L
+1828 3291 mt 1828  957 L
+4788 4188 mt 2463 3119 L
+2463 3119 mt 2463  785 L
+5423 4017 mt 3097 2947 L
+3097 2947 mt 3097  613 L
+6057 3845 mt 3732 2776 L
+3732 2776 mt 3732  441 L
+2744 4392 mt 5775 3571 L
+5775 3571 mt 5775 1237 L
+2245 4162 mt 5275 3342 L
+5275 3342 mt 5275 1007 L
+1745 3932 mt 4776 3112 L
+4776 3112 mt 4776  777 L
+1245 3703 mt 4276 2882 L
+4276 2882 mt 4276  548 L
+ 898 3543 mt 3929 2722 L
+3929 2722 mt 6254 3792 L
+ 898 3251 mt 3929 2431 L
+3929 2431 mt 6254 3500 L
+ 898 2959 mt 3929 2139 L
+3929 2139 mt 6254 3208 L
+ 898 2667 mt 3929 1847 L
+3929 1847 mt 6254 2916 L
+ 898 2376 mt 3929 1555 L
+3929 1555 mt 6254 2624 L
+ 898 2084 mt 3929 1263 L
+3929 1263 mt 6254 2333 L
+ 898 1792 mt 3929  972 L
+3929  972 mt 6254 2041 L
+ 898 1500 mt 3929  680 L
+3929  680 mt 6254 1749 L
+SO
+6 w
+3223 4612 mt 6254 3792 L
+3223 4612 mt  898 3543 L
+ 898 3543 mt  898 1208 L
+3519 4532 mt 3590 4565 L
+3622 4713 mt 
+(350) s
+4153 4360 mt 4225 4393 L
+4256 4541 mt 
+(400) s
+4788 4188 mt 4859 4221 L
+4891 4370 mt 
+(450) s
+5423 4017 mt 5494 4049 L
+5526 4198 mt 
+(500) s
+6057 3845 mt 6129 3878 L
+6160 4026 mt 
+(550) s
+2744 4392 mt 2669 4412 L
+2395 4555 mt 
+(150) s
+2245 4162 mt 2169 4183 L
+1896 4326 mt 
+(200) s
+1745 3932 mt 1669 3953 L
+1396 4096 mt 
+(250) s
+1245 3703 mt 1170 3723 L
+ 896 3866 mt 
+(300) s
+ 898 3543 mt  827 3510 L
+ 631 3549 mt 
+(-3) s
+ 898 3251 mt  827 3218 L
+ 631 3257 mt 
+(-2) s
+ 898 2959 mt  827 2926 L
+ 631 2965 mt 
+(-1) s
+ 898 2667 mt  827 2635 L
+ 715 2673 mt 
+(0) s
+ 898 2376 mt  827 2343 L
+ 715 2381 mt 
+(1) s
+ 898 2084 mt  827 2051 L
+ 715 2090 mt 
+(2) s
+ 898 1792 mt  827 1759 L
+ 715 1798 mt 
+(3) s
+ 898 1500 mt  827 1467 L
+ 715 1506 mt 
+(4) s
+gs 898 388 5357 4225 MR c np
+
+gr 
+1074 4836 mt 
+(Supply Voltage) s
+4599 4898 mt 
+(Speed, We) s
+2564  273 mt 
+(Real Component of Rotor Poles) s
+ 577 2580 mt  -90 rotate
+(Sigma) s
+90 rotate
+gs 898 388 5357 4225 MR c np
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 3891 1946 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -57 3732 1990 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -43 -123 -57 4014 2003 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -122 -56 3572 2033 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 3854 2046 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4136 2059 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3413 2076 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3695 2089 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3977 2102 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 4259 2115 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 3253 2119 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3535 2132 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -116 160 -323 -122 137 2615 2805 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3817 2145 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4099 2158 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3094 2162 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 4381 2172 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3376 2175 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -97 159 -297 -122 116 2775 2503 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -57 3658 2189 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -57 3940 2202 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -122 159 -329 -122 144 2578 2990 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -57 2934 2206 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -80 160 -274 -122 97 2934 2225 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -43 -123 -57 4222 2215 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 3216 2219 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -122 -56 4503 2228 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -43 -122 -57 3498 2232 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -64 159 -252 -122 80 3094 1968 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 3780 2245 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -103 160 -302 -123 122 2738 2683 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 159 -43 -122 -57 2775 2249 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 4062 2258 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -48 160 -233 -122 64 3253 1732 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 3057 2262 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4344 2271 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -34 159 -215 -122 48 3413 1515 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 3339 2275 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -20 160 -198 -122 34 3572 1314 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 4626 2284 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -85 159 -278 -122 103 2897 2400 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 4 160 -168 -122 7 3891 960 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -7 159 -183 -122 20 3732 1130 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3621 2288 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -122 -56 2615 2292 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3903 2301 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 2897 2305 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -67 160 -257 -123 85 3057 2140 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 4184 2314 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3179 2318 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -108 160 -307 -123 129 2701 2861 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4466 2327 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3461 2331 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -51 159 -236 -122 67 3216 1901 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4748 2340 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3743 2344 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 2738 2348 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -36 160 -217 -123 51 3376 1681 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4025 2357 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 16 160 -157 -123 -4 4014 964 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -89 159 -283 -122 108 2860 2575 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -21 159 -201 -122 36 3535 1479 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3020 2361 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 4 159 -170 -122 9 3854 1121 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -9 160 -184 -123 21 3695 1293 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 4307 2370 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3302 2374 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -57 4589 2384 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3584 2387 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -70 160 -260 -123 89 3020 2311 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 2578 2391 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -113 160 -312 -123 135 2664 3038 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -57 4871 2397 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -57 3865 2401 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 2860 2404 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -54 159 -239 -122 70 3179 2070 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 4147 2414 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 3142 2418 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -43 -122 -57 4429 2427 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -38 160 -220 -123 54 3339 1847 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 26 159 -145 -122 -15 4136 979 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 3424 2431 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -94 159 -286 -122 113 2823 2748 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 15 160 -157 -123 -3 3977 1124 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -24 159 -202 -122 38 3498 1643 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 4711 2440 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 3 159 -172 -122 10 3817 1283 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -10 160 -186 -123 24 3658 1455 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 159 -43 -122 -57 3706 2444 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -57 2701 2448 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 159 -44 -122 -56 4993 2453 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 3988 2457 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -43 -123 -57 2983 2461 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -74 160 -264 -123 94 2983 2481 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -119 160 -316 -122 141 2626 3213 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 4270 2470 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -122 -56 3264 2474 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 4552 2483 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -122 -56 3546 2487 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -57 159 -241 -122 74 3142 2237 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 39 160 -134 -123 -27 4259 1006 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 4833 2496 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3828 2500 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 2823 2504 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -40 160 -223 -123 57 3302 2013 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 27 159 -145 -122 -16 4099 1140 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -98 159 -290 -122 119 2786 2919 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 5115 2509 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4110 2513 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -25 159 -204 -122 40 3461 1807 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 16 160 -159 -123 -2 3940 1285 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3105 2517 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -11 160 -188 -123 25 3621 1618 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 2 159 -172 -122 11 3780 1444 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4392 2526 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3387 2530 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4674 2539 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -77 160 -267 -122 98 2945 2650 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -124 159 -321 -122 149 2589 3385 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3669 2543 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 2664 2547 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 4956 2552 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3951 2556 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 50 159 -122 -122 -39 4381 1045 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 2945 2560 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -60 159 -244 -122 77 3105 2404 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 5238 2565 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 4233 2569 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 39 160 -134 -123 -27 4222 1167 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3227 2573 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -43 160 -224 -122 60 3264 2177 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 4514 2582 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -102 160 -294 -123 124 2749 3089 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 27 159 -145 -122 -16 4062 1301 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3509 2586 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -27 159 -206 -122 43 3424 1970 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 16 160 -159 -123 -3 3903 1447 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 4796 2596 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -12 160 -189 -123 27 3584 1780 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3791 2599 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 3 159 -174 -122 12 3743 1606 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 2786 2603 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 5078 2609 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 4073 2613 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 62 160 -111 -122 -52 4503 1097 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3068 2616 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -81 159 -269 -122 102 2908 2817 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -43 -122 -57 5360 2622 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -57 4355 2626 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -57 3350 2630 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 52 159 -122 -122 -41 4344 1208 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -43 -123 -57 4637 2639 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -63 160 -246 -123 81 3068 2569 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -57 3632 2643 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -57 2626 2647 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 4919 2652 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 41 160 -134 -122 -29 4184 1330 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -43 -123 -57 3914 2656 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 2908 2660 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -44 159 -227 -122 63 3227 2341 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -107 160 -296 -123 129 2712 3256 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 29 159 -146 -122 -16 4025 1463 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 5201 2665 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 76 160 -101 -123 -65 4626 1162 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -122 -56 4195 2669 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -27 160 -207 -123 44 3387 2133 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -43 -122 -57 3190 2673 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 16 160 -159 -122 -3 3865 1609 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -12 160 -190 -122 27 3546 1943 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 5483 2678 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 3 159 -174 -122 12 3706 1768 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 4477 2682 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 3472 2686 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 65 159 -111 -122 -54 4466 1262 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -85 159 -272 -122 107 2871 2982 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4759 2695 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 3754 2699 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 2749 2703 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 5041 2708 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4036 2712 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 54 160 -122 -123 -42 4307 1372 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 3031 2716 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 89 159 -90 -122 -80 4748 1242 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -65 160 -248 -123 85 3031 2732 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 5323 2721 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 4318 2725 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3313 2729 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 42 159 -133 -122 -30 4147 1493 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 5605 2734 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -111 160 -299 -123 135 2675 3420 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -46 159 -228 -122 65 3190 2504 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 4600 2738 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3595 2742 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 30 160 -146 -123 -16 3988 1625 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 80 160 -100 -123 -68 4589 1330 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 2589 2746 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -29 160 -208 -123 46 3350 2295 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 4882 2751 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 16 159 -159 -122 -3 3828 1771 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 3876 2755 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -13 159 -190 -122 29 3509 2104 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 3 160 -175 -123 13 3669 1930 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 2871 2759 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 104 160 -81 -123 -93 4871 1335 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 5164 2764 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4158 2768 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 68 159 -110 -122 -57 4429 1429 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -88 159 -274 -122 111 2834 3145 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3153 2772 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 5445 2777 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4440 2781 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3435 2785 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 5727 2791 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -121 -123 -44 4270 1537 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 93 159 -88 -122 -83 4711 1413 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4722 2794 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -67 160 -250 -123 88 2994 2894 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3717 2798 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 119 159 -70 -122 -109 4993 1444 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 2712 2802 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 5004 2808 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 44 159 -132 -122 -32 4110 1657 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3999 2811 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 2994 2815 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -115 160 -301 -123 140 2638 3581 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -48 159 -228 -122 67 3153 2665 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -57 5286 2821 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 83 160 -99 -123 -72 4552 1501 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 32 160 -146 -123 -17 3951 1788 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -57 4281 2825 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3276 2828 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -30 160 -209 -123 48 3313 2456 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 17 159 -159 -122 -3 3791 1933 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -43 -123 -57 5568 2834 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -12 159 -191 -122 30 3472 2265 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 3 160 -174 -123 12 3632 2092 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 135 159 -60 -122 -125 5115 1569 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 109 160 -78 -122 -99 4833 1512 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -57 4563 2838 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -57 3557 2842 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 72 159 -108 -122 -60 4392 1597 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 5850 2847 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 353 160 18 -122 -341 6094 3396 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -92 159 -275 -122 115 2797 3305 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -43 -123 -57 4845 2851 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 3839 2855 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 2834 2859 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -122 -56 5126 2864 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 152 160 -50 -123 -143 5238 1712 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -43 -122 -57 4121 2868 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 60 160 -120 -123 -47 4233 1704 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 99 159 -88 -122 -87 4674 1588 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 3116 2872 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 125 160 -68 -123 -115 4956 1627 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -70 160 -251 -123 92 2957 3053 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 5408 2877 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 4403 2881 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 309 159 7 -122 -298 5972 3055 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 159 -43 -122 -57 3398 2885 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 47 159 -131 -122 -34 4073 1822 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 172 159 -41 -122 -162 5360 1874 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 5690 2890 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 4685 2894 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -49 159 -229 -122 70 3116 2824 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -120 160 -302 -122 146 2600 3737 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 87 160 -96 -122 -76 4514 1673 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 3680 2898 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 34 160 -145 -123 -19 3914 1952 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -43 -123 -57 2675 2902 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 5972 2903 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 192 160 -31 -123 -183 5483 2057 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 272 160 -3 -123 -262 5850 2757 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 143 159 -58 -122 -133 5078 1760 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4967 2907 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -30 160 -209 -123 49 3276 2616 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 115 159 -76 -122 -104 4796 1692 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 19 159 -159 -122 -4 3754 2096 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 3962 2911 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 215 159 -22 -122 -206 5605 2263 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 242 159 -13 -122 -232 5727 2495 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -12 159 -191 -122 30 3435 2426 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 4 160 -173 -123 12 3595 2253 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 2957 2915 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 341 159 14 -122 -330 5935 3371 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 5249 2920 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 76 159 -107 -122 -64 4355 1768 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 4244 2924 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -122 -56 3238 2928 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -95 159 -276 -122 120 2760 3461 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 162 160 -48 -123 -152 5201 1912 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 5531 2933 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 4526 2937 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3520 2941 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 104 160 -85 -123 -93 4637 1766 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 64 160 -118 -122 -51 4195 1873 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 298 160 3 -123 -287 5813 3041 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 133 160 -65 -123 -123 4919 1815 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 5813 2946 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 4807 2950 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 183 159 -38 -122 -172 5323 2084 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3802 2954 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -71 160 -252 -122 95 2919 3210 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 2797 2958 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 6094 2959 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 262 159 -7 -122 -252 5690 2754 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 206 160 -27 -122 -196 5445 2280 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 51 159 -130 -122 -37 4036 1989 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 5089 2963 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 232 160 -17 -123 -222 5568 2502 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4084 2967 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3079 2971 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 93 159 -95 -122 -80 4477 1848 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 152 159 -55 -122 -141 5041 1956 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -49 159 -229 -122 71 3079 2982 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 5371 2976 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 37 160 -144 -122 -21 3876 2117 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 330 160 9 -122 -318 5775 3350 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4366 2980 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 123 159 -74 -122 -111 4759 1877 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3361 2984 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -30 160 -208 -122 49 3238 2775 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 21 159 -157 -122 -5 3717 2258 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 5653 2989 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 5 160 -173 -122 12 3557 2414 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -12 159 -190 -122 30 3398 2586 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4648 2993 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 172 160 -44 -123 -162 5164 2118 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3643 2997 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 80 160 -105 -123 -68 4318 1941 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 2638 3001 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -57 5935 3003 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 287 159 -2 -122 -276 5653 3032 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 4930 3006 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3925 3010 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -96 160 -276 -123 122 2723 3615 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 196 159 -34 -122 -186 5286 2304 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 141 160 -62 -123 -130 4882 2007 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 2919 3014 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 111 160 -82 -123 -100 4600 1948 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 252 160 -13 -123 -241 5531 2756 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 222 159 -24 -122 -211 5408 2515 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -57 5212 3020 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 68 159 -116 -122 -54 4158 2043 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 4207 3023 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3201 3027 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -57 5494 3033 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -57 4488 3037 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -72 159 -251 -122 96 2882 3365 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 54 160 -128 -123 -40 3999 2157 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 318 159 4 -122 -306 5616 3334 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 162 159 -51 -122 -152 5004 2159 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3483 3040 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 100 159 -93 -122 -86 4440 2027 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -43 -122 -57 5775 3046 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 4770 3050 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 130 159 -71 -122 -118 4722 2066 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 3765 3054 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 40 159 -141 -122 -24 3839 2282 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -50 160 -228 -123 72 3042 3138 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 2760 3057 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 186 160 -41 -122 -174 5126 2333 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 276 160 -7 -123 -265 5494 3028 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -43 -122 -57 5052 3063 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 24 160 -156 -123 -8 3680 2422 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 4047 3067 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -30 159 -207 -122 50 3201 2932 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 211 160 -29 -123 -201 5249 2534 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -57 3042 3071 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 241 159 -19 -122 -229 5371 2763 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 8 159 -172 -122 11 3520 2575 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 86 160 -102 -123 -73 4281 2116 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -11 160 -189 -123 30 3361 2745 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 5334 3076 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 159 -43 -122 -57 4329 3080 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 152 160 -59 -123 -140 4845 2206 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -57 3324 3084 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 118 160 -79 -123 -106 4563 2133 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 159 -44 -122 -56 5616 3089 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 4611 3093 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -99 160 -275 -123 126 2686 3764 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 73 159 -114 -122 -59 4121 2216 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -43 -123 -57 3606 3097 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 306 160 -1 -122 -293 5456 3322 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -57 2600 3101 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 174 159 -47 -122 -163 4967 2369 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 4893 3106 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 3888 3110 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -43 -122 -57 2882 3114 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 59 160 -125 -123 -44 3962 2326 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 106 159 -89 -122 -93 4403 2209 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 265 159 -13 -122 -253 5334 3029 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 201 159 -36 -122 -189 5089 2558 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -74 159 -250 -122 99 2845 3516 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 5175 3119 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 140 159 -67 -122 -128 4685 2261 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -122 -56 4169 3123 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 229 160 -24 -123 -218 5212 2776 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 3164 3127 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 5456 3132 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 44 159 -140 -122 -27 3802 2449 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4451 3136 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -51 160 -227 -123 74 3005 3291 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 3446 3140 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 27 160 -153 -123 -10 3643 2585 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 93 160 -100 -123 -79 4244 2295 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 163 160 -55 -122 -151 4807 2412 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -29 159 -206 -122 51 3164 3087 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4733 3149 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 10 159 -170 -122 9 3483 2736 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -9 160 -187 -123 29 3324 2903 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3728 3153 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 128 160 -76 -123 -115 4526 2324 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 2723 3157 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 293 159 -7 -122 -280 5297 3316 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 5015 3162 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 189 160 -43 -123 -177 4930 2589 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4010 3166 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3005 3170 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 79 159 -110 -122 -65 4084 2391 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 253 160 -19 -123 -241 5175 3036 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 218 159 -31 -122 -206 5052 2795 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 5297 3175 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -101 160 -274 -123 129 2649 3909 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 4292 3179 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3287 3183 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 151 159 -63 -122 -139 4648 2463 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 115 159 -86 -122 -101 4366 2396 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 65 160 -123 -123 -49 3925 2498 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 4574 3192 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 3568 3196 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -74 159 -248 -122 101 2808 3663 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 4856 3205 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 177 159 -51 -122 -164 4770 2627 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 49 159 -136 -122 -32 3765 2617 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 3850 3209 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 2845 3213 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 280 160 -12 -122 -267 5137 3315 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 101 160 -96 -123 -87 4207 2478 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 5137 3218 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -50 160 -225 -123 74 2968 3442 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 32 160 -151 -123 -14 3606 2750 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 206 160 -38 -123 -194 4893 2821 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4132 3222 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 139 160 -72 -122 -125 4488 2521 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 241 159 -26 -122 -227 5015 3048 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3127 3226 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -26 159 -204 -122 50 3127 3241 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 14 159 -167 -122 6 3446 2897 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -6 160 -184 -123 26 3287 3061 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4414 3235 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3409 3239 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 87 159 -107 -122 -71 4047 2569 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 4696 3249 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 164 160 -58 -123 -151 4611 2672 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3691 3252 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 2686 3256 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 125 159 -82 -122 -110 4329 2588 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -57 4978 3262 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -101 160 -271 -122 131 2611 4049 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -57 3973 3266 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 71 160 -119 -123 -55 3888 2672 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 194 159 -45 -122 -181 4733 2853 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 2968 3269 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 267 159 -19 -122 -253 4978 3320 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 227 160 -32 -123 -214 4856 3067 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -57 4255 3279 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -57 3249 3283 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 55 159 -133 -122 -37 3728 2787 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -73 159 -246 -122 101 2771 3808 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 110 160 -91 -122 -96 4169 2665 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 151 159 -67 -122 -138 4451 2726 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -43 -123 -57 4537 3292 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 3531 3296 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 37 160 -147 -122 -18 3568 2915 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -48 160 -221 -122 73 2930 3590 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -122 -56 4818 3305 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 18 159 -164 -122 3 3409 3058 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -43 -122 -57 3813 3309 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -24 159 -201 -122 48 3090 3394 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 181 160 -54 -123 -166 4574 2892 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -3 160 -180 -122 24 3249 3217 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 2808 3313 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 96 159 -103 -122 -80 4010 2752 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 4095 3322 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 253 160 -25 -122 -239 4818 3331 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 214 159 -39 -122 -200 4696 3092 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 138 160 -77 -123 -122 4292 2787 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 159 -43 -122 -57 3090 3326 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 4377 3335 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 3372 3339 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 80 160 -115 -122 -63 3850 2850 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4659 3348 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 3654 3352 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 166 159 -61 -122 -152 4414 2939 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 2649 3356 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 122 159 -87 -122 -106 4132 2858 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 63 160 -128 -123 -44 3691 2959 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3936 3365 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 200 160 -47 -123 -185 4537 3124 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -122 -56 2930 3369 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -72 160 -241 -123 101 2734 3948 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 239 159 -32 -122 -225 4659 3349 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 44 159 -143 -122 -25 3531 3083 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 4218 3378 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3212 3382 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -45 159 -218 -122 72 2893 3736 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 25 160 -159 -123 -3 3372 3220 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 106 160 -98 -123 -89 3973 2939 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 152 160 -71 -123 -137 4255 2995 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 4499 3391 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -20 160 -196 -123 45 3053 3545 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 3 159 -177 -122 20 3212 3374 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3494 3395 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3776 3408 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 185 159 -56 -122 -169 4377 3164 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 2771 3412 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 89 159 -109 -122 -72 3813 3031 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 225 160 -40 -122 -209 4499 3373 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4058 3421 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 137 159 -81 -122 -120 4095 3059 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3053 3425 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 4340 3434 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 72 160 -124 -123 -52 3654 3135 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3335 3438 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3617 3451 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 169 160 -64 -123 -154 4218 3213 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 52 159 -137 -122 -32 3494 3252 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 2611 3455 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 120 160 -92 -123 -102 3936 3133 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3899 3464 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 32 160 -154 -123 -10 3335 3384 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 209 159 -49 -122 -192 4340 3405 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 2893 3468 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 -40 159 -212 -122 68 2856 3880 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 10 159 -171 -122 14 3175 3531 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -14 160 -191 -123 40 3016 3696 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -57 4180 3478 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3175 3481 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 102 159 -104 -122 -84 3776 3219 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 154 159 -74 -122 -137 4058 3270 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 3457 3495 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -57 3739 3508 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 84 160 -117 -123 -64 3617 3316 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 192 160 -57 -122 -175 4180 3445 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -57 2734 3512 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 159 -43 -122 -57 4021 3521 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 137 160 -86 -123 -117 3899 3336 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -57 3016 3525 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 64 159 -132 -122 -41 3457 3425 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -43 -123 -57 3298 3538 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 41 160 -147 -123 -18 3298 3549 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 175 159 -66 -122 -157 4021 3493 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -123 -56 3580 3551 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 18 159 -165 -122 7 3138 3689 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 117 159 -97 -122 -97 3739 3413 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 -7 160 -184 -123 34 2979 3846 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 57 160 -44 -122 -56 3861 3564 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 2856 3568 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 97 160 -109 -123 -77 3580 3502 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 57 159 -44 -122 -56 3138 3581 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 157 160 -77 -122 -138 3861 3551 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3420 3594 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 77 159 -124 -122 -54 3420 3603 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3702 3607 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 138 159 -89 -122 -116 3702 3618 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 54 160 -140 -123 -29 3261 3718 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 2979 3624 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 29 159 -157 -122 -3 3101 3849 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -123 -56 3261 3637 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 116 160 -101 -122 -94 3542 3697 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -56 3542 3650 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 94 159 -115 -122 -71 3383 3789 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+123 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3101 3680 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 159 -43 -122 -56 3383 3693 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 71 160 -131 -122 -44 3223 3893 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+122 56 160 -43 -122 -57 3223 3737 4 MP
+gs
+c1
+PP
+gr
+c0
+DP
+
+gr 
+
+end
+
+eplot
+%%EndObject graph 1
+
+epage
+end
+
+showpage
+
+%%Trailer
+%%EOF
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/withe10.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/withe10.sty
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..aaaf15cf67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/withe10.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,532 @@
+% withe12.sty

+% LaTeX Style Option for University of Wisconsin Thesis Format

+% Adapted from the Purdue University Thesis Format

+% Originally by Dave Kraynie

+% Edits by Darrell McCauley

+% Adapted to UW-Madison format by Eric Benedict  (Noted with <EB>)

+\typeout{Style Option `mythe12' v1.0 <24 May 00>}

+

+

+% Some useful definitions!

+%   (inferred by context by EB, so they may be wrong... cavet emptor)

+% \z@ is the number zero

+% \p@ is pt

+%

+

+\newcommand{\@SL}[2]{\setlength{#1}{#2}}

+

+%=============================================================================

+% FONTS

+%=============================================================================

+\lineskip 1pt            % \lineskip is 1pt for all font sizes.

+\normallineskip 1pt

+\def\baselinestretch{1.5}

+

+%=============================================================================

+% These commands can be used in the thesis to switch between single

+% and double spacing.  This is needed, for instance, in the abstract.

+%=============================================================================

+\newcommand{\oneskip}{1.0}

+\newcommand{\twoskip}{1.5}

+\newcommand{\singlespace}

+  {\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{\oneskip}\Large\normalsize}

+\newcommand{\doublespace}

+  {\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{\twoskip}\Large\normalsize}

+

+%=============================================================================

+% Each size-changing command \SIZE executes the command

+%        \@setsize\SIZE{BASELINESKIP}\FONTSIZE\@FONTSIZE

+% where:

+%   BASELINESKIP = Normal value of \baselineskip for that size.  (Actual

+%                  value will be \baselinestretch * BASELINESKIP.)

+%

+%  \FONTSIZE     = Name of font-size command.  The currently available

+%                  (preloaded) font sizes are: \vpt (5pt), \vipt (6pt),

+%                  \viipt (etc.), \viiipt, \ixpt, \xpt, \xipt, \xiipt,

+%                  \xivpt, \xviipt, \xxpt, \xxvpt.

+%  \@FONTSIZE    = The same as the font-size command except with an

+%                  '@' in front---e.g., if \FONTSIZE = \xivpt then

+%                  \@FONTSIZE = \@xivpt.

+%

+%=============================================================================

+%\renewcommand{\@normalsize}{\@setsize\normalsize{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt

+%\abovedisplayskip 12pt plus3pt minus7pt%

+%\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip

+%\abovedisplayshortskip  \z@ plus3pt%

+%\belowdisplayshortskip  6.5pt plus3.5pt minus3pt}

+

+\renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{10pt}{12pt}\selectfont

+\abovedisplayskip 10pt plus2pt minus5pt%

+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip

+\abovedisplayshortskip  \z@ plus3pt%

+\belowdisplayshortskip  6pt plus3pt minus3pt}

+

+%\def\small{\@setsize\small{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt

+%\abovedisplayskip 11pt plus3pt minus6pt%

+%\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip

+%\abovedisplayshortskip  \z@ plus3pt%

+%\belowdisplayshortskip  6.5pt plus3.5pt minus3pt

+%\def\@listi{\parsep 4.5pt plus 2pt minus 1pt

+%            \itemsep \parsep

+%            \topsep 9pt plus 3pt minus 5pt}}

+

+\newcommand{\small}{\fontsize{9pt}{11pt}\selectfont

+\abovedisplayskip 8.5pt plus3pt minus4pt%

+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip

+\abovedisplayshortskip  \z@ plus2pt%

+\belowdisplayshortskip  4pt plus2pt minus2pt

+\def\@listi{\parsep 2pt plus 2pt minus 1pt

+            \itemsep \parsep

+            \topsep 4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt}}

+

+\newcommand{\footnotesize}{\fontsize{8pt}{9.5pt}\selectfont

+\abovedisplayskip 6pt plus2pt minus4pt%

+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip

+\abovedisplayshortskip  \z@ plus1pt%

+\belowdisplayshortskip  3pt plus1pt minus2pt

+\def\@listi{\topsep 3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt\parsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt

+\itemsep \parsep}}

+

+\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\fontsize{7pt}{8pt}\selectfont}

+\newcommand{\tiny}{\fontsize{5pt}{6pt}\selectfont}

+\newcommand{\large}{\fontsize{12pt}{14pt}\selectfont}

+\newcommand{\Large}{\fontsize{14pt}{18pt}\selectfont}

+\newcommand{\LARGE}{\fontsize{17pt}{22pt}\selectfont}

+\newcommand{\huge}{\fontsize{20pt}{25pt}\selectfont}

+\newcommand{\Huge}{\fontsize{25pt}{30pt}\selectfont}

+

+\normalsize  % Choose the normalsize font.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% PAGE LAYOUT

+%=============================================================================

+% All margin dimensions measured from a point one inch from top and side

+% of page.

+%=============================================================================

+\setlength\voffset{0in}

+\setlength\hoffset{0in}

+

+%=============================================================================

+% SIDE MARGINS:

+%=============================================================================

+\if@twoside      % Values for two-sided printing:

+  \setlength\oddsidemargin{18bp}    %   Left margin on odd-numbered pages.

+  \setlength\evensidemargin{0bp}    %   Left margin on even-numbered pages.

+  \setlength\marginparwidth{68bp}   %   Width of marginal notes.

+\else            % Values for one-sided printing:

+  \if@msmargin           %  Values for MS thesis margins

+    \setlength\oddsidemargin{18bp}  %   Note that \oddsidemargin = \evensidemargin

+    \setlength\evensidemargin{18bp} % 1.25" left margin

+  \else                  %  Values for non-MS thesis margins (PhD, etc)

+    \setlength\oddsidemargin{0bp}   %   Note that \oddsidemargin = \evensidemargin

+    \setlength\evensidemargin{0bp}  % 1" left margin

+  \fi

+  \setlength\marginparwidth{68bp}

+\fi

+% units of these changed from pt to bp by EB

+

+%=============================================================================

+% VERTICAL SPACING:

+%=============================================================================

+                              % Top of page:

+\setlength\topmargin{0pt}      %    Nominal distance from top of page to top of

+                               %    box containing running head.  Relative to a

+                               %    automatic one inch margin.

+\setlength\headheight{12bp}    %    Height of box containing running head.

+\setlength\headsep{24bp}       %    Space between running head and text.

+\setlength\topskip{12bp}       %    '\baselineskip' for first line of page.

+                              % Bottom of page:

+\setlength\footskip{24bp}      %    Distance from baseline of box containing foot

+                               %    to baseline of last line of text.

+\newlength{\majorheadskip}

+\setlength{\majorheadskip}{60bp}  % Amount of vertical space to skip before a

+             % major heading (such as a chapter).

+             % Re-defined by the tableofcontents, etc.

+% units of these changed from pt to bp by mccauley

+% top margin changed to 1 in margin by EB

+%=============================================================================

+% DIMENSION OF TEXT:

+%=============================================================================

+\@SL{\textheight}{8.5in}     % Height of text (including footnotes and figures,

+                                      % excluding running head and foot).

+                                      % changed from 8.75 to 8.5in EB

+\addtolength{\textheight}{-\maxdepth} % to account for depth of font

+                         % see p. 63 of TeXbook -- mccauley

+\if@msmargin

+   \setlength{\textwidth}{6.25in}     % Width of text line, MS Thesis is narrower

+\else

+   \setlength{\textwidth}{6.5in}      % Width of text line. Changed from 6.0 by EB

+\fi

+                                    % For two-column mode:

+\setlength\columnsep{10pt}          %    Space between columns

+\setlength\columnseprule{0pt}       %    Width of rule between columns.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% A \raggedbottom command causes 'ragged bottom' pages: pages set to

+% natural height instead of being stretched to exactly \textheight.

+%=============================================================================

+

+%=============================================================================

+% FOOTNOTES:

+%=============================================================================

+\setlength{\footnotesep}{8.4pt}    % Height of strut placed at the beginning of every

+                                   % footnote = height of normal \footnotesize strut,

+                                   % so no extra space between footnotes.

+\skip\footins 10.8pt plus 4pt minus 2pt  % Space between last line of text and

+                                         % top of first footnote.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% FLOATS: (a float is something like a figure or table)

+%

+%  FOR FLOATS ON A TEXT PAGE:

+%

+%    ONE-COLUMN MODE OR SINGLE-COLUMN FLOATS IN TWO-COLUMN MODE:

+%=============================================================================

+\@SL{\floatsep}{14pt plus 2pt minus 4pt}  % Space between adjacent floats

+                                          % moved to top or bottom of text

+                                          % page.

+\@SL{\textfloatsep}{20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt}    % Space between main text

+                                                % and floats at top or

+                                                % bottom of page.

+\@SL{\intextsep}{14pt plus 4pt minus 4pt}      % Space between in-text

+                                               % figures and text.

+

+%=============================================================================

+%    TWO-COLUMN FLOATS IN TWO-COLUMN MODE:

+%=============================================================================

+\setlength{\dblfloatsep}{14pt plus 2pt minus 4pt}     % Same as \floatsep for

+                                                      % double-column figures

+                                                      % in two-column mode.

+\setlength{\dbltextfloatsep}{20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt} % \textfloatsep for double-

+                                                      % column floats.

+

+%=============================================================================

+%  FOR FLOATS ON A SEPARATE FLOAT PAGE OR COLUMN:

+%    ONE-COLUMN MODE OR SINGLE-COLUMN FLOATS IN TWO-COLUMN MODE:

+%=============================================================================

+\setlength\@fptop{0pt plus 1fil}  % Stretch at top of float page/column. (Must be

+                          % 0pt plus ...)

+\setlength\@fpsep{10pt plus 2fil}    % Space between floats on float page/column.

+\setlength\@fpbot{0pt plus 1fil}     % Stretch at bottom of float page/column. (Must be

+                          % 0pt plus ... )

+

+%=============================================================================

+%  DOUBLE-COLUMN FLOATS IN TWO-COLUMN MODE.

+%=============================================================================

+\setlength\@dblfptop{0pt plus 1fil}  % Stretch at top of float page. (Must be 0pt plus ?)

+\setlength\@dblfpsep{10pt plus 2fil} % Space between floats on float page.

+\setlength\@dblfpbot{0pt plus 1fil}  % Stretch at bottom of float page. (Must be

+                          % 0pt plus ... )

+%=============================================================================

+% MARGINAL NOTES:

+%=============================================================================

+\setlength{\marginparpush}{7pt}  % Minimum vertical separation between two

+                                 % marginal notes.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% PARAGRAPHING

+%=============================================================================

+\setlength{\parskip}{0pt plus 1pt} % Extra vertical space between paragraphs.

+\setlength{\parindent}{1.5em}      % Width of paragraph indentation.

+\setlength{\topsep}{10pt plus 4pt minus 6pt}    % Extra vertical space, in addition to

+                                   % \parskip, added above and below list and

+                                   % paragraphing environments.

+\setlength\partopsep{3pt plus 2pt minus 2pt}  % Extra vertical space, in addition to

+                                   % \parskip and \topsep, added when user

+                                   % leaves blank line before environment.

+\setlength\itemsep{5pt plus 2.5pt minus 1pt}  % Extra vertical space, in addition to

+                                   % \parskip, added between list items.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% The following page-breaking penalties are defined

+%=============================================================================

+\@lowpenalty   51      % Produced by \nopagebreak[1] or \nolinebreak[1]

+\@medpenalty  151      % Produced by \nopagebreak[2] or \nolinebreak[2]

+\@highpenalty 301      % Produced by \nopagebreak[3] or \nolinebreak[3]

+

+\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty    % Before a list or paragraph environment.

+\@endparpenalty   -\@lowpenalty    % After a list or paragraph environment.

+\@itempenalty     -\@lowpenalty    % Between list items.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% \clubpenalty         % 'Club line'  at bottom of page.

+% \widowpenalty        % 'Widow line' at top of page.

+% \displaywidowpenalty % Math display widow line.

+% \predisplaypenalty   % Breaking before a math display.

+% \postdisplaypenalty  % Breaking after a math display.

+% \interlinepenalty    % Breaking at a line within a paragraph.

+% \brokenpenalty       % Breaking after a hyphenated line.

+%=============================================================================

+

+%=============================================================================

+% CHAPTERS AND SECTIONS

+%=============================================================================

+\newcommand\part{\cleardoublepage   % Starts new page.

+  \thispagestyle{plain}      % Page style of part page is 'plain'

+  \if@twocolumn              % IF two-column style

+    \onecolumn               %  THEN \onecolumn

+    \@tempswatrue            %       @tempswa := true

+  \else \@tempswafalse \fi   %  ELSE @tempswa := false

+  \hbox{}\vfil               % Add fil glue to center title

+  \bgroup  \centering        % BEGIN centering

+  \secdef\@part\@spart}

+

+\def\@part[#1]#2{

+  \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax        % IF secnumdepth > -2

+    \refstepcounter{part}                %   THEN step part counter

+    \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart %        add toc line

+    \hspace{1em}#1}\else                 %   ELSE add unnumbered line

+    \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}\fi   % FI

+  \markboth{}{}

+  \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax        % IF secnumdepth > -2

+    \huge\bface Part \thepart            %   THEN Print 'Part' and number

+    \par                                 %         in \huge bold.

+    \vskip 20pt \fi                      %        Add space before title.

+  \Huge \bface                           % Print Title in \Huge bold.

+  #1\@endpart}

+

+\def\@spart#1{\Huge \bface #1\@endpart}  % Print title in \Huge boldface

+

+%=============================================================================

+% \@endpart finishes the part page

+%=============================================================================

+\def\@endpart{\par\egroup    % END centering

+  \vfil\newpage              % End page with 1fil glue.

+  \if@twoside                % IF twoside printing

+    \hbox{}                  %   THEN Produce totally blank page

+    \thispagestyle{empty}

+    \newpage

+  \fi                        % FI

+  \if@tempswa                % IF @tempswa = true

+    \twocolumn               %   THEN \twocolumn

+  \fi}                       % FI

+

+%=============================================================================

+% \@makechapterhead {TEXT} : Makes the heading for the \chapter command.

+%

+% Note: the \singlespace definition in this and the following command

+% has two functions.  It singlespaces multi-line chapter headings, and

+% it makes sure that the heading appears at the same place on the page

+% regardless of the mode in which the text is being set.  This latter

+% discovery was rather painful, and was due to an insight from Cal Ribbens.

+%=============================================================================

+\def\@makechapterhead#1{              % Heading for \chapter command

+  \vspace*{\majorheadskip}            % Space at top of text page.

+  { \parindent 0pt            % So centered chapter titles don't

+    \topsep 0pt                       % get extra space inserted above them.

+    \parskip 0pt

+    \singlespace\Large\bf         % Changed \bface to \bf EB

+ %   \begin{center}                    % set as centered paragraph

+ Chapter

+      \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne    % IF secnumdepth > -1 THEN

+        \@chapnumber\ \

+      \fi

+      \\[1 em]

+      {#1}

+ %   \end{center}

+    \par\nobreak                      % TeX penalty to prevent page break.

+    \vskip 20pt}}                     % Space between title and text.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% \@makeschapterhead {TEXT} : Makes the heading for the \chapter* command.

+%=============================================================================

+\def\@makeschapterhead#1{             % Heading for \chapter command

+  \vspace*{\majorheadskip}            % Space at top of text page.

+  { \parindent 0pt            % So centered chapter titles don't

+    \topsep 0pt                       % get extra space inserted above them.

+    \parskip 0pt

+    \singlespace\Large\bf         % Changed \bface to \bf EB

+%    \centering{#1}                    % set as centered paragraph

+    {#1}

+    \par\nobreak                      % TeX penalty to prevent page break.

+    \vskip 20pt}}                     % Space between title and text.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% \@appendixchapterhead {TEXT}

+%=============================================================================

+\def\@appendixchapterhead#1{    % Chapter heading for \appendix command

+  \vspace*{\majorheadskip}      % Space at top of text page.

+  { \parindent 0pt      % So centered chapter titles don't

+    \topsep 0pt         % get extra space inserted above them.

+    \parskip 0pt

+    \singlespace\Large\bf         % Changed \bface to \bf EB

+    \centering{\@chapnumber \vskip 0pt {#1}}  % set as centered paragraph

+    \par\nobreak                % TeX penalty to prevent page break.

+    \vskip 20pt}}               % Space between title and text.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% \@appendiceschapterhead {TEXT}

+%=============================================================================

+\newlength{\@appendlen}

+\newlength{\@appendnumlen}

+\def\@appendiceschapterhead#1{  % Chapter heading for \appendix command

+  { \parindent 0pt

+    \singlespace\Large\bf         % Changed \bface to \bf EB

+    \setlength{\@appendlen}{\hsize}

+    \settowidth{\@appendnumlen}{\@chapnumber\ \ }

+    \addtolength{\@appendlen}{-\@appendnumlen}

+    \@chapnumber\ \ \parbox[t]{\@appendlen}{\noindent#1} % set title in parbox

+    \par\nobreak                % TeX penalty to prevent page break.

+    \vskip 20pt}}               % Space between title and text.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% \secdef{UNSTARCMDS}{STARCMDS} :

+%    When defining a \chapter or \section command without using

+%    \@startsection, you can use \secdef as follows:

+%       \def\chapter { ... \secdef \CMDA \CMDB }

+%       \def\CMDA    [#1]#2{ ...     % Command to define \chapter[...]{...}

+%       \def\CMDB    #1{ ...         % Command to define \chapter*{...}

+%=============================================================================

+

+%=============================================================================

+% Start chapter, folding heading to uppercase.

+% The last line uses \secdef (mentioned above) to decide whether this

+% is a chapter* or chapter command.

+%

+% \@chaptername is a function that must be defined by the chapter command.

+% It is provided as a hook to permit the chapter name to be modified

+% automatically if required by the style.  Currently it converts the chapter

+% name to uppercase.  - removed EB

+%=============================================================================

+%\def\@chaptername#1{\uppercase {#1}}

+\def\@chaptername#1{ {#1}}

+\def\@chapstyle{chapter}

+%\def\@chapnumber{\thechapter.}  % #.

+\def\@chapnumber{\thechapter}    % # removed the period, EB

+\let\@chapterhead\@makechapterhead

+\let\@schapterhead\@makeschapterhead

+

+\def\chapter{\clearpage        % Starts new page.

+   \global\@topnum\z@          % Prevents figures from going at top of page.

+   \@afterindenttrue           % \@afterindenttrue  => indent first line

+%  \@afterindentfalse          % \@afterindentfalse => don't indent first line

+   \secdef\@chapter\@schapter} % is this chapter* or chapter ?

+

+\def\@chapter[#1]#2{

+  \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne

+    \refstepcounter{chapter}

+    \typeout{\@chapapp\space\thechapter. #2}

+    \addcontentsline{toc}{\@chapstyle}{\protect

+    \numberline{\@chapnumber}{\@chaptername{#1}}}

+  \else

+    \addcontentsline{toc}{\@chapstyle}{\@chaptername{#1}}

+  \fi

+  \chaptermark{#1}

+  \if@twocolumn          % Tests for two-column mode.

+    \@topnewpage[\@chapterhead{\@chaptername{#2}}]

+  \else \@chapterhead{\@chaptername{#2}}

+    \@afterheading \fi}  % Routine called after chapter and section heading.

+

+\def\@schapter#1{

+  \if@twocolumn

+    \@topnewpage[\@schapterhead{\@chaptername{#1}}]

+  \else \@schapterhead{\@chaptername{#1}}

+    \@afterheading\fi}

+

+%=============================================================================

+% \@startsection {NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}

+%            optional * [ALTHEADING]{HEADING}

+%    Generic command to start a section.

+%    NAME       : e.g., 'subsection'

+%    LEVEL      : a number, denoting depth of section -- e.g., chapter=1,

+%                 section = 2, etc.  A section number will be printed if

+%                 and only if LEVEL < or = the value of the secnumdepth

+%                 counter.

+%    INDENT     : Indentation of heading from left margin

+%    BEFORESKIP : Absolute value = skip to leave above the heading.

+%                 If negative, then paragraph indent of text following

+%                 heading is suppressed.

+%    AFTERSKIP  : if positive, then skip to leave below heading,

+%                       else - skip to leave to right of run-in heading.

+%    STYLE      : commands to set style

+%  If '*' missing, then increments the counter.  If it is present, then

+%  there should be no [ALTHEADING] argument.  A sectioning command

+%  is normally defined to \@startsection + its first six arguments.

+%

+% Changed \beforeskip to positive in section, subsection and subsubsection,

+% so first line of unit will be indented.

+%=============================================================================

+\def\section{\ifnum \c@section = 0   % if 1st section, add vspace to toc -dfk

+  \addtocontents{toc}{{\protect\ifnum \protect\value{tocdepth} > 0

+  {\vskip\@tocchapterskip} \protect\fi}} \fi

+  \@startsection {section}{1}{\z@}{3.5ex plus -1ex minus

+  -.2ex}{2.3ex plus .2ex}{\singlespace\large\bf}}

+\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.25ex plus -1ex minus

+  -.2ex}{1.5ex plus .2ex}{\singlespace\large\bf}}

+\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{3.25ex plus

+  -1ex minus -.2ex}{1.5ex plus .2ex}{\singlespace\large\bf}}

+\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{3.25ex plus 1ex minus .2ex}

+  {-1em}{\singlespace\normalsize\bface}}

+\def\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{4}{\parindent}

+  {3.25ex plus 1ex minus .2ex}{-1em}{\singlespace\normalsize\bface}}

+

+%=============================================================================

+% Default initializations of \...mark commands.  (See below for their

+% us in defining page styles.

+%=============================================================================

+\def\chaptermark#1{}

+% \def\sectionmark#1{}           % Preloaded definitions

+% \def\subsectionmark#1{}

+% \def\subsubsectionmark#1{}

+% \def\paragraphmark#1{}

+% \def\subparagraphmark#1{}

+

+%=============================================================================

+% The value of the counter secnumdepth gives the depth of the

+% highest-level sectioning command that is to produce section numbers.

+%=============================================================================

+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}

+

+%=============================================================================

+% LISTS

+%=============================================================================

+% The following commands are used to set the default values for the list

+% environment's parameters. See the LaTeX manual for an explanation of

+% the meanings of the parameters.  Defaults for the list environment are

+% set as follows.  First, \rightmargin, \listparindent and \itemindent

+% are set to 0pt.  Then, for a Kth level list, the command \@listK is

+% called, where 'K' denotes 'i', 'ii', ... , 'vi'.  (I.e., \@listiii is

+% called for a third-level list.)  By convention, \@listK should set

+% \leftmargin to \leftmarginK.

+%

+% For efficiency, level-one list's values are defined at top level, and

+% \@listi is defined to set only \leftmargin.

+%=============================================================================

+\setlength\leftmargini{2.5em}

+\setlength\leftmarginii{2.2em}     % > \labelsep + width of '(m)'

+\setlength\leftmarginiii{1.87em}   % > \labelsep + width of 'vii.'

+\setlength\leftmarginiv{1.7em}     % > \labelsep + width of 'M.'

+\setlength\leftmarginv{1em}

+\setlength\leftmarginvi{1em}

+

+\leftmargin\leftmargini

+\labelwidth\leftmargini\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep

+\setlength\labelsep{.5em}

+\setlength\parsep{5pt plus 2.5pt minus 1pt}

+

+\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini}

+

+\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii

+  \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep

+  \topsep 5pt plus 2.5pt minus 1pt

+  \parsep 2.5pt plus 1pt minus 1pt

+  \itemsep \parsep}

+

+\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii

+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep

+  \topsep 2.5pt plus 1pt minus 1pt

+  \parsep \z@ \partopsep 1pt plus 0pt minus 1pt

+  \itemsep \topsep}

+

+\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv

+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}

+

+\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv

+  \labelwidth\leftmarginv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}

+

+\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi

+  \labelwidth\leftmarginvi\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}

+

+%=============================================================================

+% END FILE

+%=============================================================================

diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/withe12.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/withe12.sty
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f162c99de0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/withe12.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,533 @@
+% withe12.sty

+% LaTeX Style Option for University of Wisconsin Thesis Format

+% Adapted from the Purdue University Thesis Format

+% Originally by Dave Kraynie

+% Edits by Darrell McCauley

+% Adapted to UW-Madison format by Eric Benedict  (Noted with <EB>)

+\typeout{Style Option `mythe12' v1.0 <24 May 00>}

+

+

+% Some useful definitions!

+%   (inferred by context by EB, so they may be wrong... cavet emptor)

+% \z@ is the number zero

+% \p@ is pt

+%

+

+\newcommand{\@SL}[2]{\setlength{#1}{#2}}

+

+%=============================================================================

+% FONTS

+%=============================================================================

+\lineskip 1pt            % \lineskip is 1pt for all font sizes.

+\normallineskip 1pt

+\def\baselinestretch{1.5}

+

+%=============================================================================

+% These commands can be used in the thesis to switch between single

+% and double spacing.  This is needed, for instance, in the abstract.

+%=============================================================================

+\newcommand{\oneskip}{1.0}

+\newcommand{\twoskip}{1.5}

+\newcommand{\singlespace}

+  {\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{\oneskip}\Large\normalsize}

+\newcommand{\doublespace}

+  {\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{\twoskip}\Large\normalsize}

+

+%=============================================================================

+% Each size-changing command \SIZE executes the command

+%        \@setsize\SIZE{BASELINESKIP}\FONTSIZE\@FONTSIZE

+% where:

+%   BASELINESKIP = Normal value of \baselineskip for that size.  (Actual

+%                  value will be \baselinestretch * BASELINESKIP.)

+%

+%  \FONTSIZE     = Name of font-size command.  The currently available

+%                  (preloaded) font sizes are: \vpt (5pt), \vipt (6pt),

+%                  \viipt (etc.), \viiipt, \ixpt, \xpt, \xipt, \xiipt,

+%                  \xivpt, \xviipt, \xxpt, \xxvpt.

+%  \@FONTSIZE    = The same as the font-size command except with an

+%                  '@' in front---e.g., if \FONTSIZE = \xivpt then

+%                  \@FONTSIZE = \@xivpt.

+%

+%=============================================================================

+%\renewcommand{\@normalsize}{\@setsize\normalsize{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt

+%\abovedisplayskip 12pt plus3pt minus7pt%

+%\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip

+%\abovedisplayshortskip  \z@ plus3pt%

+%\belowdisplayshortskip  6.5pt plus3.5pt minus3pt}

+

+\renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{12pt}{14.5pt}\selectfont

+\abovedisplayskip 12pt plus3pt minus7pt%

+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip

+\abovedisplayshortskip  \z@ plus3pt%

+\belowdisplayshortskip  6.5pt plus3.5pt minus3pt}

+

+%\def\small{\@setsize\small{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt

+%\abovedisplayskip 11pt plus3pt minus6pt%

+%\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip

+%\abovedisplayshortskip  \z@ plus3pt%

+%\belowdisplayshortskip  6.5pt plus3.5pt minus3pt

+%\def\@listi{\parsep 4.5pt plus 2pt minus 1pt

+%            \itemsep \parsep

+%            \topsep 9pt plus 3pt minus 5pt}}

+

+\newcommand{\small}{\fontsize{11pt}{13.6pt}\selectfont

+\abovedisplayskip 11pt plus3pt minus6pt%

+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip

+\abovedisplayshortskip  \z@ plus3pt%

+\belowdisplayshortskip  6.5pt plus3.5pt minus3pt

+\def\@listi{\parsep 4.5pt plus 2pt minus 1pt

+            \itemsep \parsep

+            \topsep 9pt plus 3pt minus 5pt}}

+

+\newcommand{\footnotesize}{\fontsize{10pt}{12pt}\selectfont

+\abovedisplayskip 10pt plus2pt minus5pt%

+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip

+\abovedisplayshortskip  \z@ plus3pt%

+\belowdisplayshortskip  6pt plus3pt minus3pt

+\def\@listi{\topsep 6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt\parsep 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt

+\itemsep \parsep}}

+

+\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\fontsize{8pt}{9.5pt}\selectfont}

+\newcommand{\tiny}{\fontsize{6pt}{7pt}\selectfont}

+\newcommand{\large}{\fontsize{14pt}{18pt}\selectfont}

+\newcommand{\Large}{\fontsize{17pt}{22pt}\selectfont}

+\newcommand{\LARGE}{\fontsize{20pt}{25pt}\selectfont}

+\newcommand{\huge}{\fontsize{25pt}{30pt}\selectfont}

+\let\Huge=\huge

+

+\normalsize  % Choose the normalsize font.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% PAGE LAYOUT

+%=============================================================================

+% All margin dimensions measured from a point one inch from top and side

+% of page.

+%=============================================================================

+\setlength\voffset{0in}

+\setlength\hoffset{0in}

+

+

+%=============================================================================

+% SIDE MARGINS:

+%=============================================================================

+\if@twoside      % Values for two-sided printing:

+  \setlength\oddsidemargin{18bp}    %   Left margin on odd-numbered pages.

+  \setlength\evensidemargin{0bp}    %   Left margin on even-numbered pages.

+  \setlength\marginparwidth{68bp}   %   Width of marginal notes.

+\else            % Values for one-sided printing:

+  \if@msmargin           %  Values for MS thesis margins

+    \setlength\oddsidemargin{18bp}  %   Note that \oddsidemargin = \evensidemargin

+    \setlength\evensidemargin{18bp} % 1.25" left margin

+  \else                  %  Values for non-MS thesis margins (PhD, etc)

+    \setlength\oddsidemargin{0bp}   %   Note that \oddsidemargin = \evensidemargin

+    \setlength\evensidemargin{0bp}  % 1" left margin

+  \fi

+  \setlength\marginparwidth{68bp}

+\fi

+% units of these changed from pt to bp by EB

+

+%=============================================================================

+% VERTICAL SPACING:

+%=============================================================================

+                              % Top of page:

+\setlength\topmargin{0pt}      %    Nominal distance from top of page to top of

+                               %    box containing running head.  Relative to a

+                               %    automatic one inch margin.

+\setlength\headheight{12bp}    %    Height of box containing running head.

+\setlength\headsep{24bp}       %    Space between running head and text.

+\setlength\topskip{12bp}       %    '\baselineskip' for first line of page.

+                              % Bottom of page:

+\setlength\footskip{24bp}      %    Distance from baseline of box containing foot

+                               %    to baseline of last line of text.

+\newlength{\majorheadskip}

+\setlength{\majorheadskip}{60bp}  % Amount of vertical space to skip before a

+             % major heading (such as a chapter).

+             % Re-defined by the tableofcontents, etc.

+% units of these changed from pt to bp by mccauley

+% top margin changed to 1 in margin by EB

+%=============================================================================

+% DIMENSION OF TEXT:

+%=============================================================================

+\@SL{\textheight}{8.5in}     % Height of text (including footnotes and figures,

+                                      % excluding running head and foot).

+                                      % changed from 8.75 to 8.5in EB

+\addtolength{\textheight}{-\maxdepth} % to account for depth of font

+                         % see p. 63 of TeXbook -- mccauley

+\if@msmargin

+   \setlength{\textwidth}{6.25in}     % Width of text line, MS Thesis is narrower

+\else

+   \setlength{\textwidth}{6.5in}      % Width of text line. Changed from 6.0 by EB

+\fi

+                                    % For two-column mode:

+\setlength\columnsep{10pt}          %    Space between columns

+\setlength\columnseprule{0pt}       %    Width of rule between columns.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% A \raggedbottom command causes 'ragged bottom' pages: pages set to

+% natural height instead of being stretched to exactly \textheight.

+%=============================================================================

+

+%=============================================================================

+% FOOTNOTES:

+%=============================================================================

+\setlength{\footnotesep}{8.4pt}    % Height of strut placed at the beginning of every

+                                   % footnote = height of normal \footnotesize strut,

+                                   % so no extra space between footnotes.

+\skip\footins 10.8pt plus 4pt minus 2pt  % Space between last line of text and

+                                         % top of first footnote.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% FLOATS: (a float is something like a figure or table)

+%

+%  FOR FLOATS ON A TEXT PAGE:

+%

+%    ONE-COLUMN MODE OR SINGLE-COLUMN FLOATS IN TWO-COLUMN MODE:

+%=============================================================================

+\@SL{\floatsep}{14pt plus 2pt minus 4pt}  % Space between adjacent floats

+                                          % moved to top or bottom of text

+                                          % page.

+\@SL{\textfloatsep}{20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt}    % Space between main text

+                                                % and floats at top or

+                                                % bottom of page.

+\@SL{\intextsep}{14pt plus 4pt minus 4pt}      % Space between in-text

+                                               % figures and text.

+

+%=============================================================================

+%    TWO-COLUMN FLOATS IN TWO-COLUMN MODE:

+%=============================================================================

+\setlength{\dblfloatsep}{14pt plus 2pt minus 4pt}     % Same as \floatsep for

+                                                      % double-column figures

+                                                      % in two-column mode.

+\setlength{\dbltextfloatsep}{20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt} % \textfloatsep for double-

+                                                      % column floats.

+

+%=============================================================================

+%  FOR FLOATS ON A SEPARATE FLOAT PAGE OR COLUMN:

+%    ONE-COLUMN MODE OR SINGLE-COLUMN FLOATS IN TWO-COLUMN MODE:

+%=============================================================================

+\setlength\@fptop{0pt plus 1fil}  % Stretch at top of float page/column. (Must be

+                          % 0pt plus ...)

+\setlength\@fpsep{10pt plus 2fil}    % Space between floats on float page/column.

+\setlength\@fpbot{0pt plus 1fil}     % Stretch at bottom of float page/column. (Must be

+                          % 0pt plus ... )

+

+%=============================================================================

+%  DOUBLE-COLUMN FLOATS IN TWO-COLUMN MODE.

+%=============================================================================

+\setlength\@dblfptop{0pt plus 1fil}  % Stretch at top of float page. (Must be 0pt plus ?)

+\setlength\@dblfpsep{10pt plus 2fil} % Space between floats on float page.

+\setlength\@dblfpbot{0pt plus 1fil}  % Stretch at bottom of float page. (Must be

+                          % 0pt plus ... )

+%=============================================================================

+% MARGINAL NOTES:

+%=============================================================================

+\setlength{\marginparpush}{7pt}  % Minimum vertical separation between two

+                                 % marginal notes.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% PARAGRAPHING

+%=============================================================================

+\setlength{\parskip}{0pt plus 1pt} % Extra vertical space between paragraphs.

+\setlength{\parindent}{1.5em}      % Width of paragraph indentation.

+\setlength{\topsep}{10pt plus 4pt minus 6pt}    % Extra vertical space, in addition to

+                                   % \parskip, added above and below list and

+                                   % paragraphing environments.

+\setlength\partopsep{3pt plus 2pt minus 2pt}  % Extra vertical space, in addition to

+                                   % \parskip and \topsep, added when user

+                                   % leaves blank line before environment.

+\setlength\itemsep{5pt plus 2.5pt minus 1pt}  % Extra vertical space, in addition to

+                                   % \parskip, added between list items.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% The following page-breaking penalties are defined

+%=============================================================================

+\@lowpenalty   51      % Produced by \nopagebreak[1] or \nolinebreak[1]

+\@medpenalty  151      % Produced by \nopagebreak[2] or \nolinebreak[2]

+\@highpenalty 301      % Produced by \nopagebreak[3] or \nolinebreak[3]

+

+\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty    % Before a list or paragraph environment.

+\@endparpenalty   -\@lowpenalty    % After a list or paragraph environment.

+\@itempenalty     -\@lowpenalty    % Between list items.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% \clubpenalty         % 'Club line'  at bottom of page.

+% \widowpenalty        % 'Widow line' at top of page.

+% \displaywidowpenalty % Math display widow line.

+% \predisplaypenalty   % Breaking before a math display.

+% \postdisplaypenalty  % Breaking after a math display.

+% \interlinepenalty    % Breaking at a line within a paragraph.

+% \brokenpenalty       % Breaking after a hyphenated line.

+%=============================================================================

+

+%=============================================================================

+% CHAPTERS AND SECTIONS

+%=============================================================================

+\newcommand\part{\cleardoublepage   % Starts new page.

+  \thispagestyle{plain}      % Page style of part page is 'plain'

+  \if@twocolumn              % IF two-column style

+    \onecolumn               %  THEN \onecolumn

+    \@tempswatrue            %       @tempswa := true

+  \else \@tempswafalse \fi   %  ELSE @tempswa := false

+  \hbox{}\vfil               % Add fil glue to center title

+  \bgroup  \centering        % BEGIN centering

+  \secdef\@part\@spart}

+

+\def\@part[#1]#2{

+  \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax        % IF secnumdepth > -2

+    \refstepcounter{part}                %   THEN step part counter

+    \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart %        add toc line

+    \hspace{1em}#1}\else                 %   ELSE add unnumbered line

+    \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}\fi   % FI

+  \markboth{}{}

+  \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax        % IF secnumdepth > -2

+    \huge\bface Part \thepart            %   THEN Print 'Part' and number

+    \par                                 %         in \huge bold.

+    \vskip 20pt \fi                      %        Add space before title.

+  \Huge \bface                           % Print Title in \Huge bold.

+  #1\@endpart}

+

+\def\@spart#1{\Huge \bface #1\@endpart}  % Print title in \Huge boldface

+

+%=============================================================================

+% \@endpart finishes the part page

+%=============================================================================

+\def\@endpart{\par\egroup    % END centering

+  \vfil\newpage              % End page with 1fil glue.

+  \if@twoside                % IF twoside printing

+    \hbox{}                  %   THEN Produce totally blank page

+    \thispagestyle{empty}

+    \newpage

+  \fi                        % FI

+  \if@tempswa                % IF @tempswa = true

+    \twocolumn               %   THEN \twocolumn

+  \fi}                       % FI

+

+%=============================================================================

+% \@makechapterhead {TEXT} : Makes the heading for the \chapter command.

+%

+% Note: the \singlespace definition in this and the following command

+% has two functions.  It singlespaces multi-line chapter headings, and

+% it makes sure that the heading appears at the same place on the page

+% regardless of the mode in which the text is being set.  This latter

+% discovery was rather painful, and was due to an insight from Cal Ribbens.

+%=============================================================================

+\def\@makechapterhead#1{              % Heading for \chapter command

+  \vspace*{\majorheadskip}            % Space at top of text page.

+  { \parindent 0pt            % So centered chapter titles don't

+    \topsep 0pt                       % get extra space inserted above them.

+    \parskip 0pt

+    \singlespace\Large\bf         % Changed \bface to \bf EB

+ %   \begin{center}                    % set as centered paragraph

+ Chapter

+      \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne    % IF secnumdepth > -1 THEN

+        \@chapnumber\ \

+      \fi

+      \\[1 em]

+      {#1}

+ %   \end{center}

+    \par\nobreak                      % TeX penalty to prevent page break.

+    \vskip 20pt}}                     % Space between title and text.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% \@makeschapterhead {TEXT} : Makes the heading for the \chapter* command.

+%=============================================================================

+\def\@makeschapterhead#1{             % Heading for \chapter command

+  \vspace*{\majorheadskip}            % Space at top of text page.

+  { \parindent 0pt            % So centered chapter titles don't

+    \topsep 0pt                       % get extra space inserted above them.

+    \parskip 0pt

+    \singlespace\Large\bf         % Changed \bface to \bf EB

+%    \centering{#1}                    % set as centered paragraph

+    {#1}

+    \par\nobreak                      % TeX penalty to prevent page break.

+    \vskip 20pt}}                     % Space between title and text.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% \@appendixchapterhead {TEXT}

+%=============================================================================

+\def\@appendixchapterhead#1{    % Chapter heading for \appendix command

+  \vspace*{\majorheadskip}      % Space at top of text page.

+  { \parindent 0pt      % So centered chapter titles don't

+    \topsep 0pt         % get extra space inserted above them.

+    \parskip 0pt

+    \singlespace\Large\bf         % Changed \bface to \bf EB

+    \centering{\@chapnumber \vskip 0pt {#1}}  % set as centered paragraph

+    \par\nobreak                % TeX penalty to prevent page break.

+    \vskip 20pt}}               % Space between title and text.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% \@appendiceschapterhead {TEXT}

+%=============================================================================

+\newlength{\@appendlen}

+\newlength{\@appendnumlen}

+\def\@appendiceschapterhead#1{  % Chapter heading for \appendix command

+  { \parindent 0pt

+    \singlespace\Large\bf         % Changed \bface to \bf EB

+    \setlength{\@appendlen}{\hsize}

+    \settowidth{\@appendnumlen}{\@chapnumber\ \ }

+    \addtolength{\@appendlen}{-\@appendnumlen}

+    \@chapnumber\ \ \parbox[t]{\@appendlen}{\noindent#1} % set title in parbox

+    \par\nobreak                % TeX penalty to prevent page break.

+    \vskip 20pt}}               % Space between title and text.

+

+%=============================================================================

+% \secdef{UNSTARCMDS}{STARCMDS} :

+%    When defining a \chapter or \section command without using

+%    \@startsection, you can use \secdef as follows:

+%       \def\chapter { ... \secdef \CMDA \CMDB }

+%       \def\CMDA    [#1]#2{ ...     % Command to define \chapter[...]{...}

+%       \def\CMDB    #1{ ...         % Command to define \chapter*{...}

+%=============================================================================

+

+%=============================================================================

+% Start chapter, folding heading to uppercase.

+% The last line uses \secdef (mentioned above) to decide whether this

+% is a chapter* or chapter command.

+%

+% \@chaptername is a function that must be defined by the chapter command.

+% It is provided as a hook to permit the chapter name to be modified

+% automatically if required by the style.  Currently it converts the chapter

+% name to uppercase.  - removed EB

+%=============================================================================

+%\def\@chaptername#1{\uppercase {#1}}

+\def\@chaptername#1{ {#1}}

+\def\@chapstyle{chapter}

+%\def\@chapnumber{\thechapter.}  % #.

+\def\@chapnumber{\thechapter}    % # removed the period, EB

+\let\@chapterhead\@makechapterhead

+\let\@schapterhead\@makeschapterhead

+

+\def\chapter{\clearpage        % Starts new page.

+   \global\@topnum\z@          % Prevents figures from going at top of page.

+   \@afterindenttrue           % \@afterindenttrue  => indent first line

+%  \@afterindentfalse          % \@afterindentfalse => don't indent first line

+   \secdef\@chapter\@schapter} % is this chapter* or chapter ?

+

+\def\@chapter[#1]#2{

+  \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne

+    \refstepcounter{chapter}

+    \typeout{\@chapapp\space\thechapter. #2}

+    \addcontentsline{toc}{\@chapstyle}{\protect

+    \numberline{\@chapnumber}{\@chaptername{#1}}}

+  \else

+    \addcontentsline{toc}{\@chapstyle}{\@chaptername{#1}}

+  \fi

+  \chaptermark{#1}

+  \if@twocolumn          % Tests for two-column mode.

+    \@topnewpage[\@chapterhead{\@chaptername{#2}}]

+  \else \@chapterhead{\@chaptername{#2}}

+    \@afterheading \fi}  % Routine called after chapter and section heading.

+

+\def\@schapter#1{

+  \if@twocolumn

+    \@topnewpage[\@schapterhead{\@chaptername{#1}}]

+  \else \@schapterhead{\@chaptername{#1}}

+    \@afterheading\fi}

+

+%=============================================================================

+% \@startsection {NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}

+%            optional * [ALTHEADING]{HEADING}

+%    Generic command to start a section.

+%    NAME       : e.g., 'subsection'

+%    LEVEL      : a number, denoting depth of section -- e.g., chapter=1,

+%                 section = 2, etc.  A section number will be printed if

+%                 and only if LEVEL < or = the value of the secnumdepth

+%                 counter.

+%    INDENT     : Indentation of heading from left margin

+%    BEFORESKIP : Absolute value = skip to leave above the heading.

+%                 If negative, then paragraph indent of text following

+%                 heading is suppressed.

+%    AFTERSKIP  : if positive, then skip to leave below heading,

+%                       else - skip to leave to right of run-in heading.

+%    STYLE      : commands to set style

+%  If '*' missing, then increments the counter.  If it is present, then

+%  there should be no [ALTHEADING] argument.  A sectioning command

+%  is normally defined to \@startsection + its first six arguments.

+%

+% Changed \beforeskip to positive in section, subsection and subsubsection,

+% so first line of unit will be indented.

+%=============================================================================

+\def\section{\ifnum \c@section = 0   % if 1st section, add vspace to toc -dfk

+  \addtocontents{toc}{{\protect\ifnum \protect\value{tocdepth} > 0

+  {\vskip\@tocchapterskip} \protect\fi}} \fi

+  \@startsection {section}{1}{\z@}{3.5ex plus -1ex minus

+  -.2ex}{2.3ex plus .2ex}{\singlespace\large\bf}}

+\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.25ex plus -1ex minus

+  -.2ex}{1.5ex plus .2ex}{\singlespace\large\bf}}

+\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{3.25ex plus

+  -1ex minus -.2ex}{1.5ex plus .2ex}{\singlespace\large\bf}}

+\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{3.25ex plus 1ex minus .2ex}

+  {-1em}{\singlespace\normalsize\bface}}

+\def\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{4}{\parindent}

+  {3.25ex plus 1ex minus .2ex}{-1em}{\singlespace\normalsize\bface}}

+

+%=============================================================================

+% Default initializations of \...mark commands.  (See below for their

+% us in defining page styles.

+%=============================================================================

+\def\chaptermark#1{}

+% \def\sectionmark#1{}           % Preloaded definitions

+% \def\subsectionmark#1{}

+% \def\subsubsectionmark#1{}

+% \def\paragraphmark#1{}

+% \def\subparagraphmark#1{}

+

+%=============================================================================

+% The value of the counter secnumdepth gives the depth of the

+% highest-level sectioning command that is to produce section numbers.

+%=============================================================================

+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}

+

+%=============================================================================

+% LISTS

+%=============================================================================

+% The following commands are used to set the default values for the list

+% environment's parameters. See the LaTeX manual for an explanation of

+% the meanings of the parameters.  Defaults for the list environment are

+% set as follows.  First, \rightmargin, \listparindent and \itemindent

+% are set to 0pt.  Then, for a Kth level list, the command \@listK is

+% called, where 'K' denotes 'i', 'ii', ... , 'vi'.  (I.e., \@listiii is

+% called for a third-level list.)  By convention, \@listK should set

+% \leftmargin to \leftmarginK.

+%

+% For efficiency, level-one list's values are defined at top level, and

+% \@listi is defined to set only \leftmargin.

+%=============================================================================

+\setlength\leftmargini{2.5em}

+\setlength\leftmarginii{2.2em}     % > \labelsep + width of '(m)'

+\setlength\leftmarginiii{1.87em}   % > \labelsep + width of 'vii.'

+\setlength\leftmarginiv{1.7em}     % > \labelsep + width of 'M.'

+\setlength\leftmarginv{1em}

+\setlength\leftmarginvi{1em}

+

+\leftmargin\leftmargini

+\labelwidth\leftmargini\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep

+\setlength\labelsep{.5em}

+\setlength\parsep{5pt plus 2.5pt minus 1pt}

+

+\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini}

+

+\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii

+  \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep

+  \topsep 5pt plus 2.5pt minus 1pt

+  \parsep 2.5pt plus 1pt minus 1pt

+  \itemsep \parsep}

+

+\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii

+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep

+  \topsep 2.5pt plus 1pt minus 1pt

+  \parsep \z@ \partopsep 1pt plus 0pt minus 1pt

+  \itemsep \topsep}

+

+\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv

+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}

+

+\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv

+  \labelwidth\leftmarginv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}

+

+\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi

+  \labelwidth\leftmarginvi\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}

+

+%=============================================================================

+% END FILE

+%=============================================================================

diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/withesis.cls b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/withesis.cls
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ddb17310dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/withesis.cls
@@ -0,0 +1,1302 @@
+% withesis.cls
+% LaTeX Style file for the University of Wisconsin-Madison Thesis Format
+% Adapted from the Purdue University Thesis Format
+% Originally by Dave Kraynie
+% Edits by Darrell McCauley
+% Adapted to UW-Madison format by Eric Benedict  (Noted with <EB>)
+% Updated to LaTeX2e by Eric Benedict 24 July 00
+% 
+%=============================================================================
+% Licensed under the Perl Artistic License.
+% see: http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/licenses.artistic.html
+% for more info...
+%=============================================================================
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesClass{withesis}[2000/07/24 Univ. of Wisconsin-Madison Thesis Format]
+\typeout{Document Class `withesis' v2.0 <24 July 00>}
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+%  Set up the paper size
+%=============================================================================
+\setlength\paperheight{11in}
+\setlength\paperwidth{8.5in}
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+%  The type size option is handled by reading a different file for each
+%  size, as follows, to define font size-specific commands:
+%       10pt : withe10, 11pt : withe11, 12pt : withe12
+%  Performed by defining \@ptsize to hold the last digit
+%=============================================================================
+\newcommand\@ptsize{}
+\DeclareOption{10pt}{\renewcommand\@ptsize{0}}  % 10pt option reads in withe10.STY
+\DeclareOption{11pt}{\renewcommand\@ptsize{2}  % 10pt option reads in withe10.STY
+     \typeout{11pt not available, subsituting 12pt}}   % 11pt option reads in withe12.STY
+\DeclareOption{12pt}{\renewcommand\@ptsize{2}}   % 12pt option reads in withe12.STY
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+% Two-side or one-side printing.
+% \@twosidefalse                      % Default is one-sided printing.
+%=============================================================================
+\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue % Defines twoside option.
+           \@mparswitchtrue}          % Marginpars go on outside of page.
+
+%=============================================================================
+%  Margin Check option
+% \overfullrule = 0pt                 % Default is don't mark overfull hboxes.
+%=============================================================================
+\DeclareOption{margincheck}{\overfullrule 5pt}  % Causes overfull hboxes to be marked.
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+%  Masters Thesis margin option
+%  \@msmarginfalse                    % Default is 1" margins all around
+%  The margins must be modified in the \documentstyle because they will have
+%  already been set by the time the pre-amble is processed.  The \@msmargin
+%  flag is also used to change the defaults for the \thesis and \degree
+%=============================================================================
+\newif\if@msmargin                % Creates switch, default is false
+\DeclareOption{msthesis}{\@msmargintrue       % Defines 1.5" left margins
+      \typeout{Using UW Master's Thesis Margins and Defaults}}
+
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+% The \ProcessOptions\relax command causes the execution of every command
+% which is defined with \DeclareOption{FOO} and for which the user typed the
+% FOO option in his \documentclass command.  For every option BAR he typed for
+% which BAR is not defined, the file BAR.sty will be read after the present
+% (main) .STY file is executed.
+%=============================================================================
+\ExecuteOptions{10pt}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+\RequirePackage{withe1\@ptsize}
+
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+%  Set up the font definition a la Standard LaTeX
+%
+%=============================================================================
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
+
+
+
+
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+% LISTS
+%=============================================================================
+
+%=============================================================================
+% ENUMERATE
+%  Enumeration is done with four counters: enumi, enumii, enumiii
+%  and enumiv, where enumN controls the numbering of the Nth level
+%  enumeration.  The label is generated by the commands \labelenumi
+%  ... \labelenumiv.  The expansion of \p@enumN\theenumN defines the
+%  output of a \ref command.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\labelenumi{\arabic{enumi}.}
+\def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}
+\def\labelenumii{(\alph{enumii})}
+\def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}
+\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}
+\def\labelenumiii{\roman{enumiii}.}
+\def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}
+\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
+\def\labelenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}.}
+\def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}
+\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% ITEMIZE
+% Itemization is controlled by four commands: \labelitemi, \labelitemii,
+% \labelitemiii, and \labelitemiv, which define the labels of the various
+% itemization levels.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}
+\def\labelitemii{\bface --}
+\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$}
+\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% VERSE
+%   The verse environment is defined by making clever use of the
+%   list environment's parameters.  The user types \\ to end a line.
+%   This is implemented by \let'in \\ equal \@centercr.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\verse{\let\\=\@centercr
+  \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em\listparindent \itemindent
+          \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item[]}
+\let\endverse=\endlist
+
+%=============================================================================
+% QUOTATION
+%   Fills lines; Indents paragraph
+%=============================================================================
+\def\quotation{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em
+  \itemindent\listparindent
+  \rightmargin\leftmargin\parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item[]}
+\let\endquotation=\endlist
+
+%=============================================================================
+% QUOTE -- same as quotation except no paragraph indentation,
+%=============================================================================
+\def\quote{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]}
+\let\endquote=\endlist
+
+%=============================================================================
+% DESCRIPTION
+%   To change the formatting of the label, redefine \descriptionlabel.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\descriptionlabel#1{\hspace\labelsep \bface #1}
+\def\description{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
+  \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}
+\let\enddescription\endlist
+\newdimen\descriptionmargin
+\descriptionmargin=3em
+
+%=============================================================================
+% OTHER ENVIRONMENTS
+%=============================================================================
+
+%=============================================================================
+% THEOREM
+% \@begintheorem ... \@endtheorem are the commands executed at the
+% beginning and end of a (user-defined) theorem-like environment.
+% Except \@opargbegintheorem is executed when an optional argument is
+% given.  Cf. LATEX.TEX.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\trivlist \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bface #1\ #2}]}
+\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\trivlist
+  \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bface #1\ #2\ (#3)}]}
+\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist}
+
+
+
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+% TITLEPAGE
+%  In the normal environments, the titlepage environment does nothing but
+%  start and end a page, and inhibit page numbers.  It also resets the page
+%  number to zero.  In two-column style, it still makes a one-column page.
+%=============================================================================
+\newenvironment{titlepage}
+ {\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+  \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}
+% \c@page\z@ -- deleted: count title page in thesis
+}{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% ARRAY AND TABULAR
+%=============================================================================
+\arraycolsep 5pt     % Half the space between columns in an array environment.
+\tabcolsep 6pt       % Half the space between columns in a tabular environment.
+\arrayrulewidth .4pt % Width of rules in array and tabular environment.
+\doublerulesep 2pt   % Space between adjacent rules in array or tabular env.
+
+%=============================================================================
+% TABBING
+%=============================================================================
+\tabbingsep \labelsep   % Space used by the \' command.  (See LaTeX manual.)
+
+%=============================================================================
+% MINIPAGE
+%  \@minipagerestore is called upon entry to a minipage environment to
+%  set up things that are to be handled differently inside a minipage
+%  environment. In the current styles, it does nothing.
+%
+% \skip\@mpfootins : plays same role for footnotes in a minipage as
+%                    \skip\footins does for ordinary footnotes
+%=============================================================================
+\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
+
+%=============================================================================
+% FRAMEBOX
+%=============================================================================
+\fboxsep = 3pt    % Space left between box and text by \fbox and \framebox.
+\fboxrule = .4pt  % Width of rules in box made by \fbox and \framebox.
+
+%=============================================================================
+% CHAPTERS AND SECTIONS
+%=============================================================================
+% DEFINE COUNTERS:
+% \newcounter{NEWCTR}[OLDCTR] : Defines NEWCTR to be a counter, which is
+%                               reset to zero when counter OLDCTR is stepped.
+%                               Counter OLDCTR must already be defined.
+%=============================================================================
+\newcounter {part}
+\newcounter {chapter}
+\newcounter {section}[chapter]
+\newcounter {subsection}[section]
+\newcounter {subsubsection}[subsection]
+\newcounter {paragraph}[subsubsection]
+\newcounter {subparagraph}[paragraph]
+\newcounter {tocpage}
+\newcounter {lofpage}
+\newcounter {lotpage}
+\newcounter {listofheading}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% For any counter CTR, \theCTR is a macro that defines the printed version
+% of counter CTR.  It is defined in terms of the following macros:
+%
+%  \arabic{COUNTER} : The value of COUNTER printed as an arabic numeral.
+%  \roman{COUNTER}  : Its value printed as a lower-case roman numberal.
+%  \Roman{COUNTER}  : Its value printed as an upper-case roman numberal.
+%  \alph{COUNTER}   : Value of COUNTER printed as a lower-case letter:
+%                         1 = a, 2 = b, etc.
+%  \Alph{COUNTER}   : Value of COUNTER printed as an upper-case letter:
+%                           1 = A, 2 = B, etc.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\thepart          {\Roman{part}}
+\def\thechapter       {\arabic{chapter}}
+\def\thesection       {\thechapter.\arabic{section}}
+\def\thesubsection    {\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}
+\def\thesubsubsection {\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}
+\def\theparagraph     {\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}
+\def\thesubparagraph  {\theparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% TABLE OF CONTENTS, ETC.
+%=============================================================================
+% A \subsection command writes a
+%       \contentsline{subsection}{TITLE}{PAGE}
+% command on the .toc file, where TITLE contains the contents of the
+% entry and PAGE is the page number.  If subsections are being numbered,
+% then TITLE will be of the form
+%       \numberline{NUM}{HEADING}
+% where NUM is the number produced by \thesubsection.  Other sectioning
+% commands work similarly.
+%
+% A \caption command in a 'figure' environment writes
+%    \contentsline{figure}{\numberline{NUM}{CAPTION}}{PAGE}
+% on the .lof file, where NUM is the number produced by \thefigure and
+% CAPTION is the figure caption.  It works similarly for a 'table' environment.
+%
+% The command \contentsline{NAME} expands to \l@NAME.  So, to specify
+% the table of contents, we must define \l@chapter, \l@section,
+% \l@subsection, ... ; to specify the list of figures, we must define
+% \l@figure; and so on.  Most of these can be defined with the
+% \@dottedtocline command, which works as follows.
+%
+% \@dottedtocline{LEVEL}{INDENT}{NUMWIDTH}{TITLE}{PAGE}
+%    LEVEL    : An entry is produced only if LEVEL < or = value of
+%               'tocdepth' counter.  Note, \chapter is level 0, \section
+%               is level 1, etc.
+%    INDENT   : The indentation from the outer left margin of the start of
+%               the contents line.
+%    NUMWIDTH : The width of a box in which the section number is to go,
+%               if TITLE includes a \numberline command.
+%
+% This command uses the following three parameters, which are set
+% with a \def (so em's can be used to make them depend upon the font).
+%   \@pnumwidth : The width of a box in which the page number is put.
+%   \@tocrmarg  : The right margin for multiple line entries.  One
+%                 wants \@tocrmarg > or = \@pnumwidth
+%   \@dotsep    : Separation between dots, in mu units.  Should be \def'd to
+%                 a number like 2 or 1.7
+%=============================================================================
+\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
+\def\@tocrmarg {2.55em}
+\def\@dotsep{4.5}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% The value of \@tocchapterskip when the table of contents is
+% formatted is the only value that matters.  Changing this value on
+% the fly probably won't do what you want.  Re-defining \l@chapter has
+% the same problem.  The only way around the problem I've thought of
+% is to write the spacing commands directly into the toc file from the
+% chapter command, as is done by \appendix, for instance.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\@tocchapterskip{1.0em plus 1pt}
+
+\def\l@part#1#2{\addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}
+  \addvspace{2.25em plus 1pt}  % space above part line
+  \begingroup
+  \@tempdima 3em         % width of box holding part number, used by
+    \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth             %% \numberline
+    \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+    {\large \bface       % set line in \large boldface
+    \leavevmode          % TeX command to enter horizontal mode.
+    #1\hfil \hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}}\par
+    \nobreak             % Never break after part entry
+  \endgroup}
+
+\def\l@chapter#1#2{\pagebreak[3]
+  \vskip\@tocchapterskip % space above chapter line
+  \@dottedtocline{0}{0pt}{1.5em}{{\bface #1}}{#2}}
+
+\def\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}
+\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}
+\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}}
+\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}
+\def\l@figure{\vskip 1.0em plus 1pt \@dottedtocline{0}{0em}{2.5em}}
+\let\l@table\l@figure
+
+%=============================================================================
+% TABLE OF CONTENTS; LIST OF FIGURES; LIST OF TABLES
+%=============================================================================
+% In report style, \tableofcontents, \listoffigures, etc. are always
+% set in single-column style.  @restonecol is used to keep track of
+% whether we need to switch back to double column style after the toc.
+%
+% The only known problem now is that the first page with the new
+% layout is too long.  The problem seems to be that the change to
+% textheight doesn't take place on the first page.  Even if it's the
+% first line in the table of contents macro.  Presumably the same
+% problem also occurs in the lof and lot.
+%
+% I'm taking a shot at fixing the problem by dropping in a throw-away
+% page between the change to the height parameters and the start of
+% the chapter.  Isn't elegance wonderful?
+%
+%=============================================================================
+\def\tableofcontents{\@tableof{TABLE OF CONTENTS}{}{tocpage}{toc}{}}
+
+\def\listoffigures{
+  \@tableof{LIST OF FIGURES}{Figure}{lofpage}{lof}
+  {\protect\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{LIST OF FIGURES}}}
+
+\def\listoftables{
+  \@tableof{LIST OF TABLES}{Table}{lotpage}{lot}
+  {\protect\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{LIST OF TABLES}}}
+
+\def\@tableof#1#2#3#4#5{
+{ % limit scope of following declarations!!
+  \@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\fi
+  \addtolength{\textheight}{-40pt}       % -24-16
+  \addtolength{\majorheadskip}{-40pt}    % -24-16
+  \addtolength{\headheight}{52pt}        %  36+16
+  \addtolength{\headsep}{-12pt}          % -12
+  \separatorpage{DISCARD THIS PAGE}
+  \chapter*{#1}
+  #5
+  \relax\markboth{#1}{#1}
+  \hbox to \hsize{#2 \hfil Page}
+  \singlespace
+  \setcounter{#3}{0}
+  \setcounter{listofheading}{1}  % change from 0 to 1 by mccauley, 14may93
+  \def\@oddhead{\vbox to \headheight{\vspace{4pt}
+    \hbox to \hsize{\hfil\rm\thepage} \vfil
+    \ifnum\value{#3}=1
+      \ifnum\value{listofheading}=2
+        \hbox to \hsize{Appendix\hfil} \vspace{4pt} \fi
+      \ifnum\value{listofheading}=1
+        \stepcounter{listofheading} \fi
+      \hbox to \hsize{#2 \hfil Page}
+    \else
+      \setcounter{#3}{1}
+    \fi}}
+  \def\@evenhead{\vbox to \headheight{\vspace{4pt}
+    \hbox to \hsize{\rm\thepage\hfil} \vfil
+    \ifnum\value{#3}=1
+      \ifnum\value{listofheading}=2
+        \hbox to \hsize{Appendix\hfil} \vspace{4pt} \fi
+      \ifnum\value{listofheading}=1
+        \stepcounter{listofheading} \fi
+      \hbox to \hsize{#2 \hfil Page}
+    \else
+      \setcounter{#3}{1}
+    \fi}}
+  \@starttoc{#4}  \if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi
+  \newpage
+}}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% BIBLIOGRAPHY
+%=============================================================================
+% The thebibliography environment executes the following commands:
+%
+%  o start a new 'chapter' with BIBLIOGRAPHY as the heading
+%  o produce a separator page for the bibliography
+%
+%  \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus -.07em} --
+%      Defines the `closed' format, where the blocks (major units of
+%      information) of an entry run together.
+%
+%  \sloppy  -- Used because it's rather hard to do line breaks in
+%      bibliographies,
+%
+%  \sfcode`\.=1000\relax --
+%      Causes a `.' (period) not to produce an end-of-sentence space.
+%=============================================================================
+% \altbibtitle
+%   The default title for the References chapter is ``LIST OF REFERENCES''
+%   Since some people prefer ``BIBLIOGRAPHY'', the command
+%   \altbibtitle has been added to change the chapter title.
+%   This command does nothing more than change REFERENCES to BIBLIOGRAPHY
+%============================================================================
+\def\@bibchaptitle{LIST OF REFERENCES}
+\def\altbibtitle{\def\@bibchaptitle{BIBLIOGRAPHY}}
+\def\thebibliography#1{
+  %\separatorpage{\@bibchaptitle}
+  \global\@bibpresenttrue
+  \chapter*{\@bibchaptitle\markboth{\@bibchaptitle}{\@bibchaptitle}}
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@bibchaptitle}
+  \vspace{0.375in}    % added to match 4 line requirement
+  \interlinepenalty=10000 % added to prevent breaking of bib entries
+  \singlespace\list
+  {[\arabic{enumi}]}{\settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}\leftmargin\labelwidth
+    \advance\leftmargin\labelsep \usecounter{enumi}}
+  \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus -.07em}
+  \sloppy
+  \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}
+\let\endthebibliography=\endlist
+
+%=============================================================================
+% \def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}  % Produces the label for \bibitem[...]
+% \def\@cite#1{[#1]}            % Produces the output of the \cite command.
+%=============================================================================
+
+%=============================================================================
+% THEINDEX ENVIRONMENT
+%   Produces double column format, with each paragraph a separate entry.
+%   The user commands \item, \subitem and \subsubitem are used to
+%   produce the entries, and \indexspace adds an extra vertical space
+%   that's the right size to put above the first entry with a new letter
+%   of the alphabet.
+%=============================================================================
+\newif\if@restonecol
+\def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
+  \columnseprule \z@
+  \columnsep 35pt\twocolumn[\@makeschapterhead{Index}]
+  \markboth{INDEX}{INDEX}\thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@
+  \parskip\z@ plus .3pt\relax\let\item\@idxitem}
+\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40pt}
+\def\subitem{\par\hangindent 40pt \hspace*{20pt}}
+\def\subsubitem{\par\hangindent 40pt \hspace*{30pt}}
+\def\endtheindex{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
+\def\indexspace{\par \vskip 10pt plus 5pt minus 3pt\relax}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% FOOTNOTES
+%=============================================================================
+% \footnoterule is a macro to draw the rule separating the footnotes from
+% the text.  It should take zero vertical space, so it needs a negative
+% skip to compensate for any positive space taken by the rule.  (See
+% PLAIN.TEX.)
+%=============================================================================
+\def\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@
+  \hrule width .4\columnwidth
+  \kern 2.6\p@}                 % The \hrule has default height of .4pt .
+% \newcounter{footnote}
+\@addtoreset{footnote}{chapter}  % Numbers footnotes within chapters
+
+%=============================================================================
+% \@makefntext{NOTE} :
+%   Must produce the actual footnote, using \@thefnmark as the mark
+%   of the footnote and NOTE as the text.  It is called when effectively
+%   inside a \parbox of width \columnwidth (i.e., with \hsize =
+%   \columnwidth).
+%
+%   The following macro indents all lines of the footnote by 10pt, and
+%   indents the first line of a new paragraph by 1em.  To change these
+%   dimensions, just substitute the desired value for '10pt' [in both
+%   places] or '1em'.  The mark is flushright against the footnote.
+%     \long\def\@makefntext#1{\@setpar{\@@par\@tempdima \hsize
+%        \advance\@tempdima-10pt\parshape \@ne 10pt \@tempdima}\par
+%        \parindent 1em\noindent \hbox to \z@{\hss$^{\@thefnmark}$}#1}
+%
+%   A simpler macro is used, in which the footnote text is
+%   set like an ordinary text paragraph, with no indentation except
+%   on the first line of a paragraph, and the first line of the
+%   footnote.  Thus, all the macro must do is set \parindent
+%   to the appropriate value for succeeding paragraphs and put the
+%   proper indentation before mark.
+%=============================================================================
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\noindent
+  \hbox to 1.8em{\hss$^{\@thefnmark}$}\singlespace\footnotesize#1}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% \@makefnmark :
+%   Macro to generate the footnote marker that goes in the text. Default used.
+%=============================================================================
+
+%=============================================================================
+% FIGURES AND TABLES
+%=============================================================================
+% Float placement parameters.  See LaTeX manual for their definition.
+%
+% Note: some really flaky hiccups can happen because of interactions between
+% these numbers.  For instance, if \textfraction and \floatpagefraction
+% don't have any overlap figures can be drawn that are too large to fit
+% on a text page and too small to fit on a float page.  This problem causes
+% all of the figures to go to the end of the chapter.
+%=============================================================================
+\setcounter{topnumber}{2}
+\def\topfraction{.5}
+\setcounter{bottomnumber}{1}
+\def\bottomfraction{.3}
+\setcounter{totalnumber}{3}
+\def\textfraction{.5}     % previously .55
+\def\floatpagefraction{.3}
+\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{2}
+\def\dbltopfraction{.7}
+\def\dblfloatpagefraction{.5}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% \@makecaption{NUMBER}{TEXT} : Macro to make a figure or table caption.
+%      NUMBER : Figure or table number--e.g., 'Figure 3.2'
+%      TEXT   : The caption text.
+%  Macro should be called inside a \parbox of right width, with \normalsize.
+%=============================================================================
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{
+  \vskip 10pt
+  \singlespace\centering
+  #1\ \ #2}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% ORIGINAL \@makecaption - Centering OR Flushleft if long.
+% Thesis office doesn't really like this version.
+%=============================================================================
+% \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{
+%   \vskip 10pt
+%   \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#1\ \ #2}
+%   \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize           % IF   longer than one line:
+%     {\singlespace \unhbox\@tempboxa\par} % THEN set as ordinary paragraph.
+%   \else                                  % ELSE center.
+%        \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}
+%   \fi}
+%=============================================================================
+
+%=============================================================================
+% NEW \@makecaption - Thesis Format may not like the new format
+%=============================================================================
+% \newlength\@capnumlen
+% \newlength\@captionlen
+% \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{
+%   \vskip 10pt
+%   \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#1\ \ #2}
+%   \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize           % IF   longer than one line:
+%   { \parindent 0pt
+%     \singlespace\normalsize
+%     \setlength{\@captionlen}{\hsize}
+%     \settowidth{\@capnumlen}{#1\ \ }
+%     \addtolength{\@captionlen}{-\@capnumlen}
+%     #1\ \ \parbox[t]{\@captionlen}{\noindent#2}
+%     \par\nobreak}                        % TeX penalty to prevent page break.
+%   \else                                  % ELSE center.
+%        \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}
+%   \fi}
+%=============================================================================
+
+%=============================================================================
+% To define a float of type TYPE (e.g., TYPE = figure), the document style
+% must define the following.
+%
+%  \fps@TYPE   : The default placement specifier for floats of type TYPE.
+%
+%  \ftype@TYPE : The type number for floats of type TYPE.  Each TYPE has
+%                associated a unique positive TYPE NUMBER, which is a power
+%                of two.  E.g., figures might have type number 1, tables type
+%                number 2, programs type number 4, etc.
+%
+%  \ext@TYPE   : The file extension indicating the file on which the
+%                contents list for float type TYPE is stored.  For example,
+%                \ext@figure = 'lof'.
+%
+%  \fnum@TYPE  : A macro to generate the figure number for a caption.
+%                For example, \fnum@TYPE == Figure \thefigure.
+%
+%  The actual float-making environment commands--e.g., the commands
+%  \figure and \endfigure--are defined in terms of the macros \@float
+%  and \end@float, which are described below.
+%
+%  \@float{TYPE}[PLACEMENT] : Macro to begin a float environment for a
+%     single-column float of type TYPE with PLACEMENT as the placement
+%     specifier.  The default value of PLACEMENT is defined by \fps@TYPE.
+%     The environment is ended by \end@float.
+%     E.g., \figure == \@float{figure}, \endfigure == \end@float.
+%=============================================================================
+
+%=============================================================================
+% FIGURE
+%=============================================================================
+\newcounter{figure}[chapter]
+\def\thefigure{\thechapter.\@arabic\c@figure}
+\def\fps@figure{tbp}
+\def\ftype@figure{1}
+\def\ext@figure{lof}
+\def\fnum@figure{Figure \thefigure}
+\def\figure{\@float{figure}}
+\let\endfigure\end@float
+\@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}}
+\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% TABLE
+%=============================================================================
+\newcounter{table}[chapter]
+\def\thetable{\thechapter.\@arabic\c@table}
+\def\fps@table{tbp}
+\def\ftype@table{2}
+\def\ext@table{lot}
+\def\fnum@table{Table \thetable}
+\def\table{\@float{table}}
+\let\endtable\end@float
+\@namedef{table*}{\@dblfloat{table}}
+\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% TITLE PAGE
+%   - define \title{} \author{} \date{}
+%   - The default degree is ``Doctor of Philosophy''
+%     Degree can be changed using the command \degree{}
+%   - for a masters project report, specify \project
+%   - for a preliminary report, specify \prelim
+%   - The default department is ``Electrical Engineering''
+%     The department can be changed using the command \department{}
+%   - once the above are defined, use \maketitle to generate the titlepage
+%=============================================================================
+\newcommand\@thesistitlemedskip{0.25in}
+\newcommand\@thesistitlebigskip{0.6in}
+\newcommand{\degree}[1]{\gdef\@degree{#1}}
+\newcommand{\project}{\gdef\@doctype{A masters project report}}
+\newcommand{\prelim}{\gdef\@doctype{A preliminary report}}
+\newcommand{\thesis}{\gdef\@doctype{A thesis}}
+\newcommand{\dissertation}{\gdef\@doctype{A dissertation}}
+\newcommand{\department}[1]{\gdef\@department{(#1)}}
+
+\if@msmargin    % Set Defaults based on Margin definition
+   \gdef\@degree{Master of Science}    % Default is MS
+   \gdef\@doctype{A thesis}            % Default is Thesis
+\else
+   \gdef\@degree{Doctor of Philosophy}    %Default is PhD
+   \gdef\@doctype{A dissertation}         %Default is dissertation
+\fi
+
+\gdef\@department{(Electrical Engineering)} % Default is Electical Engineering
+
+\newcommand{\maketitle}{%
+  \begin{titlepage}
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% -- The thesis office doesn't like thanks on title page.  Put it in
+% -- the acknowledgments.  This is here so you don't have to change
+% -- your titlepage when converting from report style. -> from Purdue, but I
+%        left it here since it seems compatible with UW-Madison, Eric
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+    \def\thanks##1{\typeout{Warning: `thanks' deleted from thesis titlepage.}}
+    \let\footnotesize\small \let\footnoterule\relax \setcounter{page}{1}
+    \vspace*{0.1in}
+    \begin{center}
+      {\bf\expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\@title}} \\[\@thesistitlebigskip]
+       by \\[\@thesistitlemedskip]
+      \@author \\[\@thesistitlebigskip]
+      \@doctype\ submitted in partial fulfillment of \\
+      the requirements for the degree of\\[\@thesistitlebigskip]
+      \@degree \\[\@thesistitlemedskip]
+      \@department \\[\@thesistitlebigskip]
+      at the \\[\@thesistitlebigskip]
+      UNIVERSITY OF WISCONSIN--MADISON\\[\@thesistitlebigskip]
+      \@date
+    \end{center}
+  \end{titlepage}
+  \setcounter{footnote}{0}
+  \setcounter{page}{1} %title page is NOT counted
+  \let\thanks\relax
+  \let\maketitle\relax \let\degree\relax \let\project\relax \let\prelim\relax
+  \let\department\relax
+  \gdef\@thanks{}\gdef\@degree{}\gdef\@doctype{}
+  \gdef\@department{}
+  %\gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}
+}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% ABSTRACT
+%=============================================================================
+% The abstract should begin with two single-spaced lines describing
+% the author and title in a standard format.  After these lines comes
+% the standard abstract.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\abstract{
+  \chapter*{ABSTRACT}
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{ABSTRACT}
+  \relax\markboth{ABSTRACT}{ABSTRACT}}
+\def\endabstract{\par\newpage}
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+% UMI ABSTRACT
+%=============================================================================
+% The UMI abstract should begin with the author and title in a standard format.
+% After the author comes the advisor and university. After these lines comes
+% a bunch of double spaced text to make up the standard abstract.
+% After the abstract, the advisor's approval signature follows.
+% This page is not numbered and is delivered seperately to the thesis office.
+%=============================================================================
+
+\def\advisortitle#1{\gdef\@advisortitle{#1}}
+\def\advisorname#1{\gdef\@advisorname{#1}}
+\gdef\@advisortitle{Professor}
+\gdef\@advisorname{Cheer E.\ Place}
+
+\def\umiabstract{
+             \thispagestyle{empty}
+                  \addtocounter{page}{-1}
+                \begin{center}
+                  {\bf\expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\@title}}\\
+                  \vspace{12pt}
+                  \@author \\
+                  \vspace{12pt}
+                  Under the supervision of \@advisortitle\ \@advisorname\\
+                  At the University of Wisconsin-Madison
+                \end{center}
+}
+
+\def\endumiabstract{\vfill \hfill\@advisorname\par\newpage}
+
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+% PAGE STYLES
+%=============================================================================
+% The page style 'foo' is defined by defining the command \ps@foo.  This
+% command should make only local definitions.  There should be no stray
+% spaces in the definition, since they could lead to mysterious extra
+% spaces in the output.
+%
+% The \ps@... command defines the macros \@oddhead, \@oddfoot,
+% \@evenhead, and \@evenfoot to define the running heads and
+% feet---e.g., \@oddhead is the macro to produce the contents of the
+% heading box for odd-numbered pages.  It is called inside an \hbox of
+% width \textwidth.
+%
+% To make headings determined by the sectioning commands, the page style
+% defines the commands \chaptermark, \sectionmark, ... , where
+% \chaptermark{TEXT} is called by \chapter to set a mark, and so on.
+% The \...mark commands and the \...head macros are defined with the
+% help of the following macros.  (All the \...mark commands should be
+% initialized to no-ops.)
+%
+% MARKING CONVENTIONS:
+% LaTeX extends TeX's \mark facility by producing two kinds of marks
+% a 'left' and a 'right' mark, using the following commands:
+%     \markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT} : Adds both marks.
+%     \markright{RIGHT}      : Adds a 'right' mark.
+%     \leftmark  : Used in the \@oddhead, \@oddfoot, \@evenhead or \@evenfoot
+%                  macro, gets the current 'left'  mark.  Works like TeX's
+%                  \botmark command.
+%     \rightmark : Used in the \@oddhead, \@oddfoot, \@evenhead or \@evenfoot
+%                  macro, gets the current 'right'  mark.  Works like TeX's
+%                  \firstmark command.
+% The marking commands work reasonably well for right marks 'numbered
+% within' left marks--e.g., the left mark is changed by a \chapter command and
+% the right mark is changed by a \section command.  However, it does
+% produce somewhat anomalous results if two \bothmark's occur on the same page.
+%=============================================================================
+\mark{{}{}}   % Initializes TeX's marks
+
+%=============================================================================
+% Definition of 'headings' page style
+%  Note use of ##1 for parameter of \def\chaptermark inside \def\ps@headings.
+%=============================================================================
+\if@twoside                                                  % If two-sided
+  \def\ps@headings{
+    \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}         % No feet.
+    \def\@evenhead{\rm \thepage\hfil \sl \leftmark}          % Left heading.
+    \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\sl \rightmark \hfil \rm\thepage}   % Right heading.
+    \def\chaptermark##1{\markboth {\uppercase{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+      \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ \fi ##1}}{}}%
+    \def\sectionmark##1{\markright {\uppercase{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
+      \thesection. \ \fi ##1}}}}
+\else                                                        % If one-sided
+  \def\ps@headings{
+    \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}                          % No feet.
+    \def\@oddhead{\hbox {}\sl \rightmark \hfil \rm\thepage}  % Heading.
+    \def\chaptermark##1{\markright {\uppercase{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+      \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ \fi ##1}}}}
+\fi
+
+%=============================================================================
+% Definition of 'thesis' page style -- riedl
+%  -- no footer
+%  -- header is just page number, in upper right corner
+%  -- chaptermark and sectionmark are not needed
+%  Note use of ##1 for parameter of \def\chaptermark inside \def\ps@headings.
+%=============================================================================
+\if@twoside                                                  % If two-sided
+  \def\ps@thesis{
+    \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}                          % No feet.
+    \def\@evenhead{\rm \thepage\hfil}                        % Left heading.
+    \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\hfil\rm\thepage}                   % Right heading.
+    \def\chaptermark##1{}
+    \def\sectionmark##1{}}
+\else                                                        % If one-sided
+  \def\ps@thesis{
+    \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}                          % No feet.
+    \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\hfil\rm\thepage}                   % Heading.
+    \def\chaptermark##1{}}
+\fi
+
+%=============================================================================
+% The following code sets \@currentipfile to current include file.
+% taken from chapterbib.sty by
+% Niel Kempson (JANET: rmcs-tex@uk.ac.cranfield.cdvc)
+
+\let\@debugoutput=\@gobble
+
+%-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Keep track of files currently opened.
+% 1. The counter @ipfilectr keeps track of the currently open I/P file,
+%    and @includefilectr keeps track of the \include files.
+% 2. @ipfilectr is set to @includefilectr, except when processing the root
+%    file. An arbitrary large (number greater than the maximum number of
+%    include files) is used to denote the root file.
+%-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+\newcounter{@ipfilectr}                 % current I/P file,
+\def\the@ipfilectr{\roman{@ipfilectr}}  % displayed as roman numerals
+\newcounter{@includefilectr}            % current \include file
+\def\@rootfilevalue{1988}               % arbitrary value for root file
+\def\savedjobname{\jobname}             % save root file name as a macro
+
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The name of the current I/P file is stored in macro \@currentipfile
+% and the global macro ipfile@the@ipfilectr is set to this name whenever
+% \@currentipfile changes.
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+\def\@currentipfile{\jobname}           % initialize to root file
+\setcounter{@ipfilectr}{\@rootfilevalue}        % ditto
+\global\@namedef{ipfile@\the@ipfilectr}{\@currentipfile}
+
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Redefine the \include macro (taken from LATEX.TEX of 25-JAN-1988) so
+% that when a file is \include'd
+% 1. \@currentipfile is updated and \includefilectr incremented
+% 2. ipfilectr set to includefilectr
+% 3. global macro ipfile@\the@ipfilectr set to \@currentfile
+%
+% When the \include'd file is finished with
+% 1. reset \@currentipfile to the root file name (\jobname)
+% 2. reset ipfilectr to \@rootfilevalue
+% 3. global macro ipfile@\the@ipfilectr set to \@currentfile
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+\def\include#1{\clearpage
+\def\@currentipfile{#1}
+\@debugoutput{\string\@currentipfile = `\@currentipfile'}
+\addtocounter{@includefilectr}{1}
+\setcounter{@ipfilectr}{\value{@includefilectr}}
+\global\@namedef{ipfile@\the@ipfilectr}{\@currentipfile}
+%
+\if@filesw \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\@input{#1.aux}}\fi
+\@tempswatrue\if@partsw \@tempswafalse\def\@tempb{#1}\@for
+\@tempa:=\@partlist\do{\ifx\@tempa\@tempb\@tempswatrue\fi}\fi
+\if@tempswa \if@filesw \let\@auxout=\@partaux
+\immediate\openout\@partaux #1.aux
+\immediate\write\@partaux{\relax}\fi\@input{#1.tex}\clearpage
+\@writeckpt{#1}\if@filesw\immediate\closeout\@partaux \fi
+\let\@auxout=\@mainaux\else\@nameuse{cp@#1}\fi
+%
+\def\@currentipfile{\jobname}
+\@debugoutput{\string\@currentipfile = `\@currentipfile'}
+\setcounter{@ipfilectr}{\@rootfilevalue}
+\global\@namedef{ipfile@\the@ipfilectr}{\@currentipfile}}
+%=============================================================================
+
+%=============================================================================
+% Definition of 'thesisdraft' page style -- riedl --dfk
+%  -- header is just page number, in upper right corner
+%  -- chaptermark and sectionmark are not needed
+%  -- footer is set to identify this as a draft version (timestamped)
+%  -- footer may be changed by changing \@draftfoot
+%  Note use of ##1 for parameter of \def\chaptermark inside \def\ps@headings.
+%=============================================================================
+\newcounter{currenthour} \newcounter{currentminute}
+\newcommand{\now}{
+  \setcounter{currenthour}{\time}\divide \c@currenthour by 60
+  \setcounter{currentminute}{\time}
+    \multiply \c@currenthour by 60
+    \addtocounter{currentminute}{-\c@currenthour}
+    \divide \c@currenthour by 60
+  \ifnum \c@currenthour=0 0 \fi    % force at least one digit in hour
+  \thecurrenthour:%
+  \ifnum \c@currentminute<10 0\fi % force two digits in minute
+  \thecurrentminute
+}
+
+% changed by mccauley to print name of currently included file.
+\def\@draftfooter{
+  {\rm DRAFT: Do Not Distribute}\hfil{\now\ \today}
+    \hfil{\tt \@currentipfile.tex}}
+
+\if@twoside                                                  % If two-sided
+  \def\ps@thesisdraft{
+    \def\@oddfoot {\@draftfooter}                            % Footer
+    \def\@evenfoot{\@draftfooter}
+    \def\@evenhead{\rm \thepage\hfil}                        % Left heading.
+    \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\hfil\rm\thepage}                   % Right heading.
+    \def\chaptermark##1{}
+    \def\sectionmark##1{}}
+\else                                                        % If one-sided
+  \def\ps@thesisdraft{
+    \def\@oddfoot {\@draftfooter}                            % Footer
+    \def\@evenfoot{}
+    \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\hfil\rm\thepage}                   % Heading.
+    \def\chaptermark##1{}}
+\fi
+
+%=============================================================================
+% Definition of 'myheadings' page style.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\ps@myheadings{
+  \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\sl\rightmark \hfil \rm\thepage}
+  \def\@oddfoot{}
+  \def\@evenhead{\rm \thepage\hfil\sl\leftmark\hbox {}}
+  \def\@evenfoot{}
+  \def\sectionmark##1{}
+  \def\subsectionmark##1{}}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% MISCELLANEOUS
+%=============================================================================
+%\def\mybox{\fbox{\hbox to 429bp {\vbox to 630bp {\null}}}}
+
+%\def\pagebox{ \setlength{\unitlength}{1.0bp}
+%             \begin{picture}(0,0)(36,558) \put(0,0){\mybox} \end{picture}
+%              \begin{picture}(0,0)(18,523.25) \put(0,0){\mybox} \end{picture}
+%              \begin{picture}(0,0)(18,500.5) \put(0,0){\mybox} \end{picture}
+%           }
+
+
+\def\draftmargins{
+  \if@msmargin % Draw box for 1.25" left margins
+      \special{!userdict begin /eop-hook{
+            gsave 0.5 setlinewidth newpath
+            90 72 moveto 540 72 lineto 540 720 lineto 90 720 lineto
+            90 72 lineto
+            stroke grestore
+%        Cross at 0.5" down and 1" from right edge
+%           gsave 0.5 setlinewidth newpath
+%           522 756 moveto 558 756 lineto
+%           540 738 moveto 540 774 lineto
+            stroke grestore
+           }def end
+   }
+  \else % Draw box for 1" margins
+      \special{!userdict begin /eop-hook{
+            gsave 0.5 setlinewidth newpath
+            72 72 moveto 540 72 lineto 540 720 lineto 72 720 lineto
+            72 72 lineto
+            stroke grestore
+%        Cross at 0.5" down and 1" from right edge
+%           gsave 0.5 setlinewidth newpath
+%           522 756 moveto 558 756 lineto
+%           540 738 moveto 540 774 lineto
+            stroke grestore
+           }def end
+   }
+
+  \fi
+}
+
+\def\draftscreen{
+   \special{!userdict begin /bop-hook{gsave
+            260 185 translate
+            65 rotate /Times-Roman findfont 144 scalefont setfont
+            0 0 moveto 0.9 setgray (DRAFT) show grestore
+            }def end
+   }
+}
+
+
+
+%============================================================================
+% VERBATIMFILE
+%============================================================================
+% \verbatimfile{<filename>}    for verbatim inclusion of a file
+% - Note that the precise layout of line breaks in this file is important!
+% - added the \singlespace - EB
+%============================================================================
+\def\verbatimfile#1{\begingroup \singlespace
+                    \@verbatim \frenchspacing \@vobeyspaces
+                    \input#1 \endgroup
+}
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+% SEPARATOR Pages
+%   Creates a blank page with a text centered horizontally and vertically.
+%   The page is neither counted nor numbered.
+%   These pages are required in the thesis format before sections such
+%   as appendices, vita, bibliography, etc.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\separatorpage#1{
+  \newpage
+  \thispagestyle{empty}
+  \addtocounter{page}{-1}
+  \null
+  \vfil\vfil
+  \begin{center}
+    {\bface #1}
+  \end{center}
+  \vfil\vfil
+  \newpage}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% \@chapapp is initially defined to be 'Chapter'.  The \appendix
+% command redefines it to be 'Appendix'.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\@chapapp{CHAPTER}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% APPENDIX
+%=============================================================================
+% The \appendix command must do the following:
+%    -- reset the chapter counter to zero
+%    -- set \@chapapp to Appendix (for messages)
+%    -- redefine the chapter counter to produce appendix numbers
+%    -- reset the section counter to zero
+%    -- redefine the \chapter command if appendix titles and headings are
+%       to look different from chapter titles and headings.
+%    -- produce special toc, lot and lof entries
+%=============================================================================
+\def\appendix{
+  \@appendix{Appendix}
+  \def\@chapstyle{appendix}
+  \def\@chapnumber{APPENDIX}
+  \let\@chapterhead\@appendixchapterhead
+  \let\@schapterhead\@appendixchapterhead}
+\def\endappendix{
+  \def\@chaptername##1{\uppercase {##1}}
+  \def\@chapstyle{chapter}
+  \def\@chapnumber{\thechapter.}
+  \let\@chapterhead\@makechapterhead
+  \let\@schapterhead\@makeschapterhead}
+
+\def\l@appendix#1#2{\pagebreak[3]
+  \vskip\@tocchapterskip % space above chapter line
+  \@dottedtocline{0}{0pt}{7.3em}{{\bface #1}}{#2}}
+
+\def\appendices{
+  \addtocontents{toc}{
+    \protect\addvspace{\@tocchapterskip}
+    \hbox to \hsize{\bface APPENDICES \hfil}
+    \protect\addvspace{\@tocchapterskip}}
+  \@appendix{Appendices}
+  \def\@chaptername##1{##1}
+  \def\@chapstyle{appendices}
+  \def\@chapnumber{Appendix\ \thechapter:}
+  \let\@chapterhead\@appendiceschapterhead
+  \let\@schapterhead\@appendiceschapterhead
+  \if@bibpresent\relax\else\separatorpage{DISCARD THIS PAGE}\fi % This
+                     % is a dirty fix.  For some reason, the TOC isn't
+             % properly written unless the simple chapter with
+             % sections is written.  The bibliography fixes this
+             % problem when its present.  If its not, then the
+             % seperator page is inserted to fix things.  EB
+}
+
+\let\endappendices\endappendix
+
+\def\l@appendices#1#2{\@dottedtocline{0}{1.5em}{6.5em}{#1}{#2}}
+
+\def\noappendixtables{\def\@lotheading{}}
+\def\noappendixfigures{\def\@lofheading{}}
+\def\@lotheading{
+  \addtocontents{lot}{
+    \protect\stepcounter{listofheading}
+    \protect\addvspace{\@tocchapterskip}
+    \hbox to \hsize{Appendix \hfil}
+    \hbox to \hsize{Table \hfil}}}
+\def\@lofheading{
+  \addtocontents{lof}{
+    \protect\stepcounter{listofheading}
+    \protect\addvspace{\@tocchapterskip}
+    \hbox to \hsize{Appendix \hfil}
+    \hbox to \hsize{Figure \hfil}}}
+
+\def\@appendix#1{\par
+  \addtocontents{toc}{{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{0}}}
+  \setcounter{chapter}{0}
+  \setcounter{section}{0}
+  \def\@chapapp{APPENDIX}
+  \def\thechapter{\Alph{chapter}}
+  \@lotheading
+  \@lofheading
+  %\separatorpage{\uppercase{#1}} % UW doesn't require a seperator page - EB
+}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% COPYRIGHTPAGE
+%=============================================================================
+% The copyright must do the following:
+% - start a new page with no number
+% - place the copyright text centered at the bottom.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\copyrightpage{
+  \newpage
+  \thispagestyle{empty}    % No page number
+  \addtocounter{page}{-1}
+  \chapter*{}            % Required for \vfill to work
+  \begin{center}
+   \vfill
+   \copyright\ Copyright by \@author\ \@date\\
+   All Rights Reserved
+  \end{center}}
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+% GLOSSARY
+%=============================================================================
+% The glossary environment must do the following:
+% - produce the table of contents entry for the glossary
+% - start a new page with GLOSSARY centered two inches from the top
+%=============================================================================
+\def\glossary{
+  \chapter*{GLOSSARY}
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{GLOSSARY}}
+\def\endglossary{\par\newpage}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% NOMENCLATURE
+%=============================================================================
+% The nomenclature environment must do the following:
+% - produce the table of contents entry for the nomenclature section
+% - start a new page with NOMENCLATURE centered two inches from the top
+%=============================================================================
+\def\nomenclature{\separatorpage{DISCARD THIS PAGE}
+  \chapter*{NOMENCLATURE}
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{NOMENCLATURE}}
+\def\endnomenclature{\par\newpage}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% LIST OF SYMBOLS
+%=============================================================================
+% The list of symbols environment must do the following:
+% - produce the table of contents entry for the list of symbols section
+% - start a new page with LIST OF SYMBOLS centered two inches from the top
+%=============================================================================
+\def\listofsymbols{\separatorpage{DISCARD THIS PAGE}
+  \chapter*{LIST OF SYMBOLS}
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{LIST OF SYMBOLS}}
+\def\endlistofsymbols{\par\newpage}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% VITA
+%=============================================================================
+% The vita environment must do the following:
+% - produce a separator page with the word vita centered
+% - produce the table of contents entry for the vita
+% - start a new page with VITA centered two inches from the top
+%=============================================================================
+\def\vita{
+%  \separatorpage{VITA}         % UW doesn't require this EB
+  \chapter*{VITA}
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{VITA}}
+\def\endvita{\par\newpage}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
+%=============================================================================
+% The acknowledgments environment must do the following:
+% - start a new page with ACKNOWLEDGMENTS centered two inches from the top
+%=============================================================================
+\def\acknowledgments{
+  \chapter*{ACKNOWLEDGMENTS}
+  \doublespace}
+\def\endacknowledgments{\par\newpage}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% DEDICATION
+%=============================================================================
+% The dedication environment must do the following:
+% - start a new page
+% - center the text vertically
+% - include the text in a center environment
+%=============================================================================
+\def\dedication{
+  \newpage
+  \null\vfil
+  \begin{center}}
+\def\enddedication{\end{center}\par\vfil\newpage}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% DATE
+%=============================================================================
+%\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
+  %January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+  %July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+  %\space\number\day, \number\year}
+\newcount\@testday
+\def\today{\@testday=\day
+  \ifnum\@testday>30 \advance\@testday by -30
+  \else\ifnum\@testday>20 \advance\@testday by -20
+  \fi\fi
+  \number\day\ \
+  \ifcase\month\or
+    January \or February \or March \or April \or May \or June \or
+    July \or August \or September \or October \or November \or December
+    \fi\ \number\year
+}
+
+
+%  Single counter for theorems and theorem-like environments:
+\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[chapter]
+\newtheorem{assertion}[theorem]{Assertion}
+\newtheorem{claim}[theorem]{Claim}
+\newtheorem{conjecture}[theorem]{Conjecture}
+\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary}
+\newtheorem{definition}[theorem]{Definition}
+\newtheorem{example}[theorem]{Example}
+\newtheorem{figger}[theorem]{Figure}
+\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma}
+\newtheorem{prop}[theorem]{Proposition}
+\newtheorem{remark}[theorem]{Remark}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% EQUATION and EQNARRAY -- put here because it must follow \chapter definition
+%
+% \newcounter{equation}
+%=============================================================================
+% \jot = 3pt      % Extra space added between lines of an eqnarray environment
+\@addtoreset{equation}{chapter}   % Makes \chapter reset 'equation' counter.
+\def\theequation{{\rm \thechapter}.\arabic{equation}}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% The macro \@eqnnum defines how equation numbers are to appear in equations.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\@eqnnum{[\theequation]}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% INITIALIZATION   -  Default initializations
+%=============================================================================
+\ps@thesis                  % 'plain' page style
+\pagenumbering{arabic}      % Arabic page numbers
+\onecolumn                  % Single-column.
+\raggedbottom               % Ragged bottom
+%\if@twoside\else\raggedbottom\fi % Ragged bottom unless twoside option.
+
+\global\newif\if@bibpresent   % Flag for the appendicies fix.  If bib present
+                              % then the seperator page isn't needed...
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Define \bface to be \bf so that all default boldface text can be
+% disabled by redefining \bface to be \null.  -dfk
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+\newcommand{\bface}{\bf}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The following penalties are for conforming with Purdue's
+% requirements for the thesis format.
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+\brokenpenalty=10000
+\clubpenalty=10000
+\widowpenalty=10000
+
+%=============================================================================
+% END FILE
+%=============================================================================
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/withesis.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/withesis.sty
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6526888121
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/withesis/withesis.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,1270 @@
+% mythesis.sty
+% LaTeX Style file for the University of Wisconsin-Madison Thesis Format
+% Adapted from the Purdue University Thesis Format
+% Originally by Dave Kraynie 
+% Edits by Darrell McCauley
+% Adapted to UW-Madison format by Eric Benedict  (Noted with <EB>)
+%=============================================================================
+% Licensed under the Perl Artistic License.
+% see: http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/licenses.artistic.html
+% for more info...
+%=============================================================================
+\typeout{Document Style `withesis' v1.0 <10 May 00>}
+
+%=============================================================================
+%  The type size option is handled by reading a different file for each 
+%  size, as follows, to define font size-specific commands:
+%       10pt : withe10, 11pt : withe11, 12pt : withe12
+%  Implemented by \def'ing \@ptsize to last digit of file name.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\@ptsize{0}                       % Default is withe10.STY
+\@namedef{ds@10pt}{\def\@ptsize{0}}   % 10pt option reads in withe10.STY
+\@namedef{ds@11pt}{\def\@ptsize{0}%
+     \typeout{11pt not available, subsituting 10pt}}   % 11pt option reads in withe10.STY
+\@namedef{ds@12pt}{\def\@ptsize{2}}   % 12pt option reads in withe12.STY
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+% Two-side or one-side printing.
+% \@twosidefalse                      % Default is one-sided printing.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\ds@twoside{\@twosidetrue         % Defines twoside option.
+           \@mparswitchtrue}          % Marginpars go on outside of page.
+
+%=============================================================================
+%  Margin Check option
+% \overfullrule = 0pt                 % Default is don't mark overfull hboxes.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\ds@margincheck{\overfullrule 5pt}  % Causes overfull hboxes to be marked.
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+%  Masters Thesis margin option
+%  \@msmarginfalse                    % Default is 1" margins all around

+%  The margins must be modified in the \documentstyle because they will have 

+%  already been set by the time the pre-amble is processed.  The \@msmargin

+%  flag is also used to change the defaults for the \thesis and \degree
+%=============================================================================
+\newif\if@msmargin	              % Creates switch, default is false
+\def\ds@msthesis{\@msmargintrue       % Defines 1.5" left margins
+      \typeout{Using UW Master's Thesis Margins and Defaults}}
+
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+% The \@options command causes the execution of every command \ds@FOO 
+% which is defined and for which the user typed the FOO option in his
+% \documentstyle command.  For every option BAR he typed for which
+% \ds@BAR is not defined, the file BAR.sty will be read after the present
+% (main) .STY file is executed.
+%=============================================================================
+\@options
+\input withe1\@ptsize.sty\relax
+
+%=============================================================================
+% LISTS
+%=============================================================================
+
+%=============================================================================
+% ENUMERATE
+%  Enumeration is done with four counters: enumi, enumii, enumiii
+%  and enumiv, where enumN controls the numbering of the Nth level
+%  enumeration.  The label is generated by the commands \labelenumi 
+%  ... \labelenumiv.  The expansion of \p@enumN\theenumN defines the 
+%  output of a \ref command.  
+%=============================================================================
+\def\labelenumi{\arabic{enumi}.}    
+\def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}     
+\def\labelenumii{(\alph{enumii})}
+\def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}
+\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}
+\def\labelenumiii{\roman{enumiii}.}
+\def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}
+\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
+\def\labelenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}.}
+\def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}     
+\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% ITEMIZE
+% Itemization is controlled by four commands: \labelitemi, \labelitemii,
+% \labelitemiii, and \labelitemiv, which define the labels of the various 
+% itemization levels.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}
+\def\labelitemii{\bface --}
+\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$}
+\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% VERSE
+%   The verse environment is defined by making clever use of the
+%   list environment's parameters.  The user types \\ to end a line.
+%   This is implemented by \let'in \\ equal \@centercr.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\verse{\let\\=\@centercr  
+  \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em\listparindent \itemindent 
+          \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item[]}
+\let\endverse\endlist
+
+%=============================================================================
+% QUOTATION
+%   Fills lines; Indents paragraph
+%=============================================================================
+\def\quotation{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em
+  \itemindent\listparindent
+  \rightmargin\leftmargin\parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item[]}
+\let\endquotation=\endlist
+
+%=============================================================================
+% QUOTE -- same as quotation except no paragraph indentation,
+%=============================================================================
+\def\quote{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]}
+\let\endquote=\endlist
+
+%=============================================================================
+% DESCRIPTION 
+%   To change the formatting of the label, redefine \descriptionlabel.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\descriptionlabel#1{\hspace\labelsep \bface #1}
+\def\description{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
+  \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}
+\let\enddescription\endlist
+\newdimen\descriptionmargin
+\descriptionmargin=3em
+
+%=============================================================================
+% OTHER ENVIRONMENTS
+%=============================================================================
+
+%=============================================================================
+% THEOREM 
+% \@begintheorem ... \@endtheorem are the commands executed at the
+% beginning and end of a (user-defined) theorem-like environment.
+% Except \@opargbegintheorem is executed when an optional argument is
+% given.  Cf. LATEX.TEX.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\trivlist \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bface #1\ #2}]}
+\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\trivlist
+  \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bface #1\ #2\ (#3)}]}
+\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist}
+
+
+
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+% TITLEPAGE
+%  In the normal environments, the titlepage environment does nothing but 
+%  start and end a page, and inhibit page numbers.  It also resets the page
+%  number to zero.  In two-column style, it still makes a one-column page.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+  \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}
+% \c@page\z@ -- deleted: count title page in thesis
+}
+\def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% ARRAY AND TABULAR
+%=============================================================================
+\arraycolsep 5pt     % Half the space between columns in an array environment.
+\tabcolsep 6pt       % Half the space between columns in a tabular environment.
+\arrayrulewidth .4pt % Width of rules in array and tabular environment.
+\doublerulesep 2pt   % Space between adjacent rules in array or tabular env.
+
+%=============================================================================
+% TABBING
+%=============================================================================
+\tabbingsep \labelsep   % Space used by the \' command.  (See LaTeX manual.)
+
+%=============================================================================
+% MINIPAGE
+%  \@minipagerestore is called upon entry to a minipage environment to
+%  set up things that are to be handled differently inside a minipage
+%  environment. In the current styles, it does nothing.
+%
+% \skip\@mpfootins : plays same role for footnotes in a minipage as
+%                    \skip\footins does for ordinary footnotes
+%=============================================================================
+\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
+
+%=============================================================================
+% FRAMEBOX
+%=============================================================================
+\fboxsep = 3pt    % Space left between box and text by \fbox and \framebox.
+\fboxrule = .4pt  % Width of rules in box made by \fbox and \framebox.
+
+%=============================================================================
+% CHAPTERS AND SECTIONS
+%=============================================================================
+% DEFINE COUNTERS:
+% \newcounter{NEWCTR}[OLDCTR] : Defines NEWCTR to be a counter, which is 
+%                               reset to zero when counter OLDCTR is stepped.  
+%                               Counter OLDCTR must already be defined.
+%=============================================================================
+\newcounter {part}
+\newcounter {chapter}
+\newcounter {section}[chapter]
+\newcounter {subsection}[section]
+\newcounter {subsubsection}[subsection]
+\newcounter {paragraph}[subsubsection]
+\newcounter {subparagraph}[paragraph]
+\newcounter {tocpage}
+\newcounter {lofpage}
+\newcounter {lotpage}
+\newcounter {listofheading}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% For any counter CTR, \theCTR is a macro that defines the printed version
+% of counter CTR.  It is defined in terms of the following macros:
+%
+%  \arabic{COUNTER} : The value of COUNTER printed as an arabic numeral.
+%  \roman{COUNTER}  : Its value printed as a lower-case roman numberal.
+%  \Roman{COUNTER}  : Its value printed as an upper-case roman numberal.
+%  \alph{COUNTER}   : Value of COUNTER printed as a lower-case letter:
+%                         1 = a, 2 = b, etc.
+%  \Alph{COUNTER}   : Value of COUNTER printed as an upper-case letter:
+%                           1 = A, 2 = B, etc.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\thepart          {\Roman{part}}
+\def\thechapter       {\arabic{chapter}}
+\def\thesection       {\thechapter.\arabic{section}}
+\def\thesubsection    {\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}
+\def\thesubsubsection {\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}
+\def\theparagraph     {\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}
+\def\thesubparagraph  {\theparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}
+                     
+%=============================================================================
+% TABLE OF CONTENTS, ETC.
+%=============================================================================
+% A \subsection command writes a 
+%       \contentsline{subsection}{TITLE}{PAGE}
+% command on the .toc file, where TITLE contains the contents of the
+% entry and PAGE is the page number.  If subsections are being numbered,
+% then TITLE will be of the form
+%       \numberline{NUM}{HEADING}
+% where NUM is the number produced by \thesubsection.  Other sectioning
+% commands work similarly.  
+%
+% A \caption command in a 'figure' environment writes
+%    \contentsline{figure}{\numberline{NUM}{CAPTION}}{PAGE}
+% on the .lof file, where NUM is the number produced by \thefigure and
+% CAPTION is the figure caption.  It works similarly for a 'table' environment.
+%
+% The command \contentsline{NAME} expands to \l@NAME.  So, to specify
+% the table of contents, we must define \l@chapter, \l@section, 
+% \l@subsection, ... ; to specify the list of figures, we must define
+% \l@figure; and so on.  Most of these can be defined with the
+% \@dottedtocline command, which works as follows.
+%
+% \@dottedtocline{LEVEL}{INDENT}{NUMWIDTH}{TITLE}{PAGE}
+%    LEVEL    : An entry is produced only if LEVEL < or = value of 
+%               'tocdepth' counter.  Note, \chapter is level 0, \section
+%               is level 1, etc.
+%    INDENT   : The indentation from the outer left margin of the start of 
+%               the contents line.
+%    NUMWIDTH : The width of a box in which the section number is to go,
+%               if TITLE includes a \numberline command.
+%   
+% This command uses the following three parameters, which are set
+% with a \def (so em's can be used to make them depend upon the font).
+%   \@pnumwidth : The width of a box in which the page number is put.
+%   \@tocrmarg  : The right margin for multiple line entries.  One
+%                 wants \@tocrmarg > or = \@pnumwidth
+%   \@dotsep    : Separation between dots, in mu units.  Should be \def'd to
+%                 a number like 2 or 1.7
+%=============================================================================
+\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
+\def\@tocrmarg {2.55em}
+\def\@dotsep{4.5}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% The value of \@tocchapterskip when the table of contents is
+% formatted is the only value that matters.  Changing this value on
+% the fly probably won't do what you want.  Re-defining \l@chapter has
+% the same problem.  The only way around the problem I've thought of
+% is to write the spacing commands directly into the toc file from the
+% chapter command, as is done by \appendix, for instance.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\@tocchapterskip{1.0em plus 1pt} 
+
+\def\l@part#1#2{\addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}
+  \addvspace{2.25em plus 1pt}  % space above part line
+  \begingroup
+  \@tempdima 3em         % width of box holding part number, used by 
+    \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth             %% \numberline
+    \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth   
+    {\large \bface       % set line in \large boldface
+    \leavevmode          % TeX command to enter horizontal mode.       
+    #1\hfil \hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}}\par
+    \nobreak             % Never break after part entry
+  \endgroup}
+
+\def\l@chapter#1#2{\pagebreak[3]
+  \vskip\@tocchapterskip % space above chapter line
+  \@dottedtocline{0}{0pt}{1.5em}{{\bface #1}}{#2}}
+
+\def\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}
+\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}
+\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}}
+\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}
+\def\l@figure{\vskip 1.0em plus 1pt \@dottedtocline{0}{0em}{2.5em}}
+\let\l@table\l@figure
+
+%=============================================================================
+% TABLE OF CONTENTS; LIST OF FIGURES; LIST OF TABLES
+%=============================================================================
+% In report style, \tableofcontents, \listoffigures, etc. are always
+% set in single-column style.  @restonecol is used to keep track of
+% whether we need to switch back to double column style after the toc.
+%
+% The only known problem now is that the first page with the new
+% layout is too long.  The problem seems to be that the change to
+% textheight doesn't take place on the first page.  Even if it's the
+% first line in the table of contents macro.  Presumably the same
+% problem also occurs in the lof and lot.
+%
+% I'm taking a shot at fixing the problem by dropping in a throw-away
+% page between the change to the height parameters and the start of
+% the chapter.  Isn't elegance wonderful?
+%
+%=============================================================================
+\def\tableofcontents{\@tableof{TABLE OF CONTENTS}{}{tocpage}{toc}{}}
+
+\def\listoffigures{
+  \@tableof{LIST OF FIGURES}{Figure}{lofpage}{lof}
+  {\protect\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{LIST OF FIGURES}}}
+
+\def\listoftables{
+  \@tableof{LIST OF TABLES}{Table}{lotpage}{lot}
+  {\protect\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{LIST OF TABLES}}}
+
+\def\@tableof#1#2#3#4#5{
+{ % limit scope of following declarations!!
+  \@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\fi
+  \addtolength{\textheight}{-40pt}       % -24-16
+  \addtolength{\majorheadskip}{-40pt}    % -24-16
+  \addtolength{\headheight}{52pt}        %  36+16
+  \addtolength{\headsep}{-12pt}          % -12
+  \separatorpage{DISCARD THIS PAGE}	
+  \chapter*{#1}
+  #5
+  \relax\markboth{#1}{#1}
+  \hbox to \hsize{#2 \hfil Page}
+  \singlespace
+  \setcounter{#3}{0}
+  \setcounter{listofheading}{1}  % change from 0 to 1 by mccauley, 14may93
+  \def\@oddhead{\vbox to \headheight{\vspace{4pt}
+    \hbox to \hsize{\hfil\rm\thepage} \vfil
+    \ifnum\value{#3}=1 
+      \ifnum\value{listofheading}=2
+        \hbox to \hsize{Appendix\hfil} \vspace{4pt} \fi
+      \ifnum\value{listofheading}=1 
+        \stepcounter{listofheading} \fi
+      \hbox to \hsize{#2 \hfil Page}
+    \else
+      \setcounter{#3}{1}
+    \fi}}
+  \def\@evenhead{\vbox to \headheight{\vspace{4pt}
+    \hbox to \hsize{\rm\thepage\hfil} \vfil
+    \ifnum\value{#3}=1 
+      \ifnum\value{listofheading}=2
+        \hbox to \hsize{Appendix\hfil} \vspace{4pt} \fi
+      \ifnum\value{listofheading}=1 
+        \stepcounter{listofheading} \fi
+      \hbox to \hsize{#2 \hfil Page}
+    \else
+      \setcounter{#3}{1}
+    \fi}}
+  \@starttoc{#4}  \if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi
+  \newpage
+}}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% BIBLIOGRAPHY
+%=============================================================================
+% The thebibliography environment executes the following commands:
+%
+%  o start a new 'chapter' with BIBLIOGRAPHY as the heading
+%  o produce a separator page for the bibliography
+%
+%  \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus -.07em} --
+%      Defines the `closed' format, where the blocks (major units of 
+%      information) of an entry run together.
+%
+%  \sloppy  -- Used because it's rather hard to do line breaks in 
+%      bibliographies,
+% 
+%  \sfcode`\.=1000\relax --
+%      Causes a `.' (period) not to produce an end-of-sentence space.
+%=============================================================================
+% \altbibtitle
+%   The default title for the References chapter is ``LIST OF REFERENCES''
+%   Since some people prefer ``BIBLIOGRAPHY'', the command
+%   \altbibtitle has been added to change the chapter title.
+%   This command does nothing more than change REFERENCES to BIBLIOGRAPHY 
+%============================================================================
+\def\@bibchaptitle{LIST OF REFERENCES}
+\def\altbibtitle{\def\@bibchaptitle{BIBLIOGRAPHY}}
+\def\thebibliography#1{
+  %\separatorpage{\@bibchaptitle}
+  \global\@bibpresenttrue
+  \chapter*{\@bibchaptitle\markboth{\@bibchaptitle}{\@bibchaptitle}}
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@bibchaptitle}
+  \vspace{0.375in}	  % added to match 4 line requirement
+  \interlinepenalty=10000 % added to prevent breaking of bib entries
+  \singlespace\list
+  {[\arabic{enumi}]}{\settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}\leftmargin\labelwidth
+    \advance\leftmargin\labelsep \usecounter{enumi}}
+  \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus -.07em}
+  \sloppy
+  \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}
+\let\endthebibliography=\endlist
+
+%=============================================================================
+% \def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}  % Produces the label for \bibitem[...]
+% \def\@cite#1{[#1]}            % Produces the output of the \cite command.
+%=============================================================================
+
+%=============================================================================
+% THEINDEX ENVIRONMENT
+%   Produces double column format, with each paragraph a separate entry.
+%   The user commands \item, \subitem and \subsubitem are used to
+%   produce the entries, and \indexspace adds an extra vertical space
+%   that's the right size to put above the first entry with a new letter
+%   of the alphabet.
+%=============================================================================
+\newif\if@restonecol
+\def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
+  \columnseprule \z@
+  \columnsep 35pt\twocolumn[\@makeschapterhead{Index}]
+  \markboth{INDEX}{INDEX}\thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@
+  \parskip\z@ plus .3pt\relax\let\item\@idxitem}
+\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40pt}
+\def\subitem{\par\hangindent 40pt \hspace*{20pt}}
+\def\subsubitem{\par\hangindent 40pt \hspace*{30pt}}
+\def\endtheindex{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
+\def\indexspace{\par \vskip 10pt plus 5pt minus 3pt\relax}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% FOOTNOTES
+%=============================================================================
+% \footnoterule is a macro to draw the rule separating the footnotes from
+% the text.  It should take zero vertical space, so it needs a negative
+% skip to compensate for any positive space taken by the rule.  (See
+% PLAIN.TEX.)
+%=============================================================================
+\def\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@   
+  \hrule width .4\columnwidth 
+  \kern 2.6\p@}                 % The \hrule has default height of .4pt .
+% \newcounter{footnote}
+\@addtoreset{footnote}{chapter}  % Numbers footnotes within chapters
+
+%=============================================================================
+% \@makefntext{NOTE} :
+%   Must produce the actual footnote, using \@thefnmark as the mark 
+%   of the footnote and NOTE as the text.  It is called when effectively
+%   inside a \parbox of width \columnwidth (i.e., with \hsize = 
+%   \columnwidth).  
+%
+%   The following macro indents all lines of the footnote by 10pt, and 
+%   indents the first line of a new paragraph by 1em.  To change these 
+%   dimensions, just substitute the desired value for '10pt' [in both 
+%   places] or '1em'.  The mark is flushright against the footnote. 
+%     \long\def\@makefntext#1{\@setpar{\@@par\@tempdima \hsize 
+%        \advance\@tempdima-10pt\parshape \@ne 10pt \@tempdima}\par
+%        \parindent 1em\noindent \hbox to \z@{\hss$^{\@thefnmark}$}#1}
+%
+%   A simpler macro is used, in which the footnote text is
+%   set like an ordinary text paragraph, with no indentation except
+%   on the first line of a paragraph, and the first line of the 
+%   footnote.  Thus, all the macro must do is set \parindent
+%   to the appropriate value for succeeding paragraphs and put the 
+%   proper indentation before mark.
+%=============================================================================
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\noindent 
+  \hbox to 1.8em{\hss$^{\@thefnmark}$}\singlespace\footnotesize#1}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% \@makefnmark :
+%   Macro to generate the footnote marker that goes in the text. Default used.
+%=============================================================================
+
+%=============================================================================
+% FIGURES AND TABLES 
+%=============================================================================
+% Float placement parameters.  See LaTeX manual for their definition.
+%
+% Note: some really flaky hiccups can happen because of interactions between
+% these numbers.  For instance, if \textfraction and \floatpagefraction
+% don't have any overlap figures can be drawn that are too large to fit
+% on a text page and too small to fit on a float page.  This problem causes
+% all of the figures to go to the end of the chapter.
+%=============================================================================
+\setcounter{topnumber}{2}
+\def\topfraction{.5}
+\setcounter{bottomnumber}{1}
+\def\bottomfraction{.3}
+\setcounter{totalnumber}{3}
+\def\textfraction{.5}     % previously .55
+\def\floatpagefraction{.3}
+\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{2}
+\def\dbltopfraction{.7}
+\def\dblfloatpagefraction{.5}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% \@makecaption{NUMBER}{TEXT} : Macro to make a figure or table caption.  
+%      NUMBER : Figure or table number--e.g., 'Figure 3.2' 
+%      TEXT   : The caption text.
+%  Macro should be called inside a \parbox of right width, with \normalsize.
+%=============================================================================
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{
+  \vskip 10pt
+  \singlespace\centering
+  #1\ \ #2}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% ORIGINAL \@makecaption - Centering OR Flushleft if long. 
+% Thesis office doesn't really like this version.
+%=============================================================================
+% \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{
+%   \vskip 10pt
+%   \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#1\ \ #2}
+%   \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize           % IF   longer than one line:
+%     {\singlespace \unhbox\@tempboxa\par} % THEN set as ordinary paragraph.
+%   \else                                  % ELSE center.
+%        \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}  
+%   \fi}
+%=============================================================================
+
+%=============================================================================
+% NEW \@makecaption - Thesis Format may not like the new format
+%=============================================================================
+% \newlength\@capnumlen
+% \newlength\@captionlen
+% \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{
+%   \vskip 10pt
+%   \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#1\ \ #2}
+%   \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize           % IF   longer than one line:
+%   { \parindent 0pt
+%     \singlespace\normalsize
+%     \setlength{\@captionlen}{\hsize}
+%     \settowidth{\@capnumlen}{#1\ \ }
+%     \addtolength{\@captionlen}{-\@capnumlen}
+%     #1\ \ \parbox[t]{\@captionlen}{\noindent#2}
+%     \par\nobreak}                        % TeX penalty to prevent page break.
+%   \else                                  % ELSE center.
+%        \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}  
+%   \fi}
+%=============================================================================
+
+%=============================================================================
+% To define a float of type TYPE (e.g., TYPE = figure), the document style 
+% must define the following.
+%
+%  \fps@TYPE   : The default placement specifier for floats of type TYPE.
+%
+%  \ftype@TYPE : The type number for floats of type TYPE.  Each TYPE has
+%                associated a unique positive TYPE NUMBER, which is a power 
+%                of two.  E.g., figures might have type number 1, tables type 
+%                number 2, programs type number 4, etc.
+%
+%  \ext@TYPE   : The file extension indicating the file on which the 
+%                contents list for float type TYPE is stored.  For example, 
+%                \ext@figure = 'lof'.
+%
+%  \fnum@TYPE  : A macro to generate the figure number for a caption.
+%                For example, \fnum@TYPE == Figure \thefigure.
+%
+%  The actual float-making environment commands--e.g., the commands
+%  \figure and \endfigure--are defined in terms of the macros \@float
+%  and \end@float, which are described below.
+%
+%  \@float{TYPE}[PLACEMENT] : Macro to begin a float environment for a 
+%     single-column float of type TYPE with PLACEMENT as the placement 
+%     specifier.  The default value of PLACEMENT is defined by \fps@TYPE.   
+%     The environment is ended by \end@float.  
+%     E.g., \figure == \@float{figure}, \endfigure == \end@float.
+%=============================================================================
+
+%=============================================================================
+% FIGURE
+%=============================================================================
+\newcounter{figure}[chapter]
+\def\thefigure{\thechapter.\@arabic\c@figure}
+\def\fps@figure{tbp}
+\def\ftype@figure{1}
+\def\ext@figure{lof}
+\def\fnum@figure{Figure \thefigure}
+\def\figure{\@float{figure}}
+\let\endfigure\end@float
+\@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}}
+\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% TABLE
+%=============================================================================
+\newcounter{table}[chapter]
+\def\thetable{\thechapter.\@arabic\c@table}
+\def\fps@table{tbp}
+\def\ftype@table{2}
+\def\ext@table{lot}
+\def\fnum@table{Table \thetable}
+\def\table{\@float{table}}
+\let\endtable\end@float
+\@namedef{table*}{\@dblfloat{table}}
+\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% TITLE PAGE
+%   - define \title{} \author{} \date{}
+%   - The default degree is ``Doctor of Philosophy''
+%     Degree can be changed using the command \degree{}
+%   - for a masters project report, specify \project
+%   - for a preliminary report, specify \prelim
+%   - The default department is ``Electrical Engineering''
+%     The department can be changed using the command \department{}
+%   - once the above are defined, use \maketitle to generate the titlepage
+%=============================================================================
+\def\@thesistitlemedskip{0.25in}
+\def\@thesistitlebigskip{0.6in}
+\def\degree#1{\gdef\@degree{#1}}
+\def\project{\gdef\@doctype{A masters project report}}
+\def\prelim{\gdef\@doctype{A preliminary report}}
+\def\thesis{\gdef\@doctype{A thesis}}

+\def\dissertation{\gdef\@doctype{A dissertation}}

+\def\department#1{\gdef\@department{(#1)}}
+
+\if@msmargin	% Set Defaults based on Margin definition
+   \gdef\@degree{Master of Science}    % Default is MS
+   \gdef\@doctype{A thesis}            % Default is Thesis
+\else
+   \gdef\@degree{Doctor of Philosophy}    %Default is PhD
+   \gdef\@doctype{A dissertation}         %Default is dissertation
+\fi
+
+\gdef\@department{(Electrical Engineering)} % Default is Electical Engineering
+
+\def\maketitle{
+  \begin{titlepage}
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% -- The thesis office doesn't like thanks on title page.  Put it in
+% -- the acknowledgments.  This is here so you don't have to change
+% -- your titlepage when converting from report style. -> from Purdue, but I
+%        left it here since it seems compatible with UW-Madison, Eric
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+    \def\thanks##1{\typeout{Warning: `thanks' deleted from thesis titlepage.}}
+    \let\footnotesize\small \let\footnoterule\relax \setcounter{page}{1}
+    \vspace*{0.1in}
+    \begin{center}
+      {\bf\expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\@title}} \\[\@thesistitlebigskip]
+       by \\[\@thesistitlemedskip]
+      \@author \\[\@thesistitlebigskip]
+      \@doctype\ submitted in partial fulfillment of \\
+      the requirements for the degree of\\[\@thesistitlebigskip]
+      \@degree \\[\@thesistitlemedskip]
+      \@department \\[\@thesistitlebigskip]
+      at the \\[\@thesistitlebigskip]
+      UNIVERSITY OF WISCONSIN--MADISON\\[\@thesistitlebigskip]
+      \@date  
+    \end{center}
+  \end{titlepage}
+  \setcounter{footnote}{0}
+  \setcounter{page}{1} %title page is NOT counted
+  \let\thanks\relax 
+  \let\maketitle\relax \let\degree\relax \let\project\relax \let\prelim\relax
+  \let\department\relax
+  \gdef\@thanks{}\gdef\@degree{}\gdef\@doctype{}
+  \gdef\@department{}
+  %\gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}
+} 
+
+%=============================================================================
+% ABSTRACT
+%=============================================================================
+% The abstract should begin with two single-spaced lines describing
+% the author and title in a standard format.  After these lines comes
+% the standard abstract.  
+%=============================================================================
+\def\abstract{
+  \chapter*{ABSTRACT}
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{ABSTRACT}
+  \relax\markboth{ABSTRACT}{ABSTRACT}}
+\def\endabstract{\par\newpage}
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+% UMI ABSTRACT
+%=============================================================================
+% The UMI abstract should begin with the author and title in a standard format.  
+% After the author comes the advisor and university. After these lines comes
+% a bunch of double spaced text to make up the standard abstract.
+% After the abstract, the advisor's approval signature follows.
+% This page is not numbered and is delivered seperately to the thesis office.
+%=============================================================================
+
+\def\advisortitle#1{\gdef\@advisortitle{#1}}
+\def\advisorname#1{\gdef\@advisorname{#1}}
+\gdef\@advisortitle{Professor}
+\gdef\@advisorname{Cheer E.\ Place}
+
+\def\umiabstract{
+ 	         \thispagestyle{empty}
+                  \addtocounter{page}{-1}
+	            \begin{center}
+	              {\bf\expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\@title}}\\
+	              \vspace{12pt}
+	              \@author \\
+	              \vspace{12pt}
+	              Under the supervision of \@advisortitle\ \@advisorname\\
+	              At the University of Wisconsin-Madison
+	            \end{center}
+}
+
+\def\endumiabstract{\vfill \hfill\@advisorname\par\newpage}
+
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+% PAGE STYLES
+%=============================================================================
+% The page style 'foo' is defined by defining the command \ps@foo.  This
+% command should make only local definitions.  There should be no stray
+% spaces in the definition, since they could lead to mysterious extra
+% spaces in the output.
+%
+% The \ps@... command defines the macros \@oddhead, \@oddfoot,
+% \@evenhead, and \@evenfoot to define the running heads and
+% feet---e.g., \@oddhead is the macro to produce the contents of the
+% heading box for odd-numbered pages.  It is called inside an \hbox of
+% width \textwidth.
+%
+% To make headings determined by the sectioning commands, the page style
+% defines the commands \chaptermark, \sectionmark, ... , where
+% \chaptermark{TEXT} is called by \chapter to set a mark, and so on.
+% The \...mark commands and the \...head macros are defined with the
+% help of the following macros.  (All the \...mark commands should be
+% initialized to no-ops.)
+%
+% MARKING CONVENTIONS:
+% LaTeX extends TeX's \mark facility by producing two kinds of marks
+% a 'left' and a 'right' mark, using the following commands:
+%     \markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT} : Adds both marks.
+%     \markright{RIGHT}      : Adds a 'right' mark.
+%     \leftmark  : Used in the \@oddhead, \@oddfoot, \@evenhead or \@evenfoot
+%                  macro, gets the current 'left'  mark.  Works like TeX's 
+%                  \botmark command.
+%     \rightmark : Used in the \@oddhead, \@oddfoot, \@evenhead or \@evenfoot
+%                  macro, gets the current 'right'  mark.  Works like TeX's 
+%                  \firstmark command.
+% The marking commands work reasonably well for right marks 'numbered 
+% within' left marks--e.g., the left mark is changed by a \chapter command and
+% the right mark is changed by a \section command.  However, it does
+% produce somewhat anomalous results if two \bothmark's occur on the same page.
+%=============================================================================
+\mark{{}{}}   % Initializes TeX's marks
+
+%=============================================================================
+% Definition of 'headings' page style 
+%  Note use of ##1 for parameter of \def\chaptermark inside \def\ps@headings.
+%=============================================================================
+\if@twoside                                                  % If two-sided 
+  \def\ps@headings{
+    \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}         % No feet.
+    \def\@evenhead{\rm \thepage\hfil \sl \leftmark}          % Left heading.
+    \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\sl \rightmark \hfil \rm\thepage}   % Right heading.
+    \def\chaptermark##1{\markboth {\uppercase{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+      \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ \fi ##1}}{}}%
+    \def\sectionmark##1{\markright {\uppercase{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
+      \thesection. \ \fi ##1}}}}
+\else                                                        % If one-sided
+  \def\ps@headings{
+    \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}                          % No feet.
+    \def\@oddhead{\hbox {}\sl \rightmark \hfil \rm\thepage}  % Heading.
+    \def\chaptermark##1{\markright {\uppercase{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+      \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ \fi ##1}}}}
+\fi
+
+%=============================================================================
+% Definition of 'thesis' page style -- riedl
+%  -- no footer
+%  -- header is just page number, in upper right corner
+%  -- chaptermark and sectionmark are not needed
+%  Note use of ##1 for parameter of \def\chaptermark inside \def\ps@headings.
+%=============================================================================
+\if@twoside                                                  % If two-sided
+  \def\ps@thesis{
+    \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}                          % No feet.
+    \def\@evenhead{\rm \thepage\hfil}                        % Left heading.
+    \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\hfil\rm\thepage}                   % Right heading.
+    \def\chaptermark##1{}
+    \def\sectionmark##1{}}
+\else                                                        % If one-sided
+  \def\ps@thesis{
+    \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}                          % No feet.
+    \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\hfil\rm\thepage}                   % Heading.
+    \def\chaptermark##1{}}
+\fi
+
+%=============================================================================
+% The following code sets \@currentipfile to current include file.
+% taken from chapterbib.sty by
+% Niel Kempson (JANET: rmcs-tex@uk.ac.cranfield.cdvc)
+
+\let\@debugoutput=\@gobble
+
+%-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Keep track of files currently opened.
+% 1. The counter @ipfilectr keeps track of the currently open I/P file,
+%    and @includefilectr keeps track of the \include files.
+% 2. @ipfilectr is set to @includefilectr, except when processing the root
+%    file. An arbitrary large (number greater than the maximum number of
+%    include files) is used to denote the root file.
+%-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+\newcounter{@ipfilectr}                 % current I/P file,
+\def\the@ipfilectr{\roman{@ipfilectr}}  % displayed as roman numerals
+\newcounter{@includefilectr}            % current \include file
+\def\@rootfilevalue{1988}               % arbitrary value for root file 
+\def\savedjobname{\jobname}             % save root file name as a macro
+
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The name of the current I/P file is stored in macro \@currentipfile 
+% and the global macro ipfile@the@ipfilectr is set to this name whenever
+% \@currentipfile changes.
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+\def\@currentipfile{\jobname}           % initialize to root file
+\setcounter{@ipfilectr}{\@rootfilevalue}        % ditto
+\global\@namedef{ipfile@\the@ipfilectr}{\@currentipfile}
+
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Redefine the \include macro (taken from LATEX.TEX of 25-JAN-1988) so
+% that when a file is \include'd
+% 1. \@currentipfile is updated and \includefilectr incremented
+% 2. ipfilectr set to includefilectr
+% 3. global macro ipfile@\the@ipfilectr set to \@currentfile
+%
+% When the \include'd file is finished with
+% 1. reset \@currentipfile to the root file name (\jobname)
+% 2. reset ipfilectr to \@rootfilevalue
+% 3. global macro ipfile@\the@ipfilectr set to \@currentfile
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+\def\include#1{\clearpage
+\def\@currentipfile{#1}                             
+\@debugoutput{\string\@currentipfile = `\@currentipfile'}    
+\addtocounter{@includefilectr}{1}                           
+\setcounter{@ipfilectr}{\value{@includefilectr}}            
+\global\@namedef{ipfile@\the@ipfilectr}{\@currentipfile}   
+%
+\if@filesw \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\@input{#1.aux}}\fi
+\@tempswatrue\if@partsw \@tempswafalse\def\@tempb{#1}\@for
+\@tempa:=\@partlist\do{\ifx\@tempa\@tempb\@tempswatrue\fi}\fi
+\if@tempswa \if@filesw \let\@auxout=\@partaux
+\immediate\openout\@partaux #1.aux
+\immediate\write\@partaux{\relax}\fi\@input{#1.tex}\clearpage
+\@writeckpt{#1}\if@filesw\immediate\closeout\@partaux \fi
+\let\@auxout=\@mainaux\else\@nameuse{cp@#1}\fi
+%
+\def\@currentipfile{\jobname}                              
+\@debugoutput{\string\@currentipfile = `\@currentipfile'}    
+\setcounter{@ipfilectr}{\@rootfilevalue}                    
+\global\@namedef{ipfile@\the@ipfilectr}{\@currentipfile}}
+%=============================================================================
+
+%=============================================================================
+% Definition of 'thesisdraft' page style -- riedl --dfk
+%  -- header is just page number, in upper right corner
+%  -- chaptermark and sectionmark are not needed
+%  -- footer is set to identify this as a draft version (timestamped)
+%  -- footer may be changed by changing \@draftfoot
+%  Note use of ##1 for parameter of \def\chaptermark inside \def\ps@headings.
+%=============================================================================
+\newcounter{currenthour} \newcounter{currentminute}
+\newcommand{\now}{
+  \setcounter{currenthour}{\time}\divide \c@currenthour by 60
+  \setcounter{currentminute}{\time}
+    \multiply \c@currenthour by 60
+    \addtocounter{currentminute}{-\c@currenthour}
+    \divide \c@currenthour by 60
+  \ifnum \c@currenthour=0 0 \fi    % force at least one digit in hour
+  \thecurrenthour:%
+  \ifnum \c@currentminute<10 0\fi % force two digits in minute
+  \thecurrentminute
+}
+
+% changed by mccauley to print name of currently included file.
+\def\@draftfooter{
+  {\rm DRAFT: Do Not Distribute}\hfil{\now\ \today}
+	\hfil{\tt \@currentipfile.tex}}
+
+\if@twoside                                                  % If two-sided
+  \def\ps@thesisdraft{
+    \def\@oddfoot {\@draftfooter}                            % Footer
+    \def\@evenfoot{\@draftfooter}
+    \def\@evenhead{\rm \thepage\hfil}                        % Left heading.
+    \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\hfil\rm\thepage}                   % Right heading.
+    \def\chaptermark##1{}
+    \def\sectionmark##1{}}
+\else                                                        % If one-sided
+  \def\ps@thesisdraft{
+    \def\@oddfoot {\@draftfooter}                            % Footer
+    \def\@evenfoot{}
+    \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\hfil\rm\thepage}                   % Heading.
+    \def\chaptermark##1{}}
+\fi
+
+%=============================================================================
+% Definition of 'myheadings' page style.  
+%=============================================================================
+\def\ps@myheadings{
+  \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\sl\rightmark \hfil \rm\thepage}
+  \def\@oddfoot{}
+  \def\@evenhead{\rm \thepage\hfil\sl\leftmark\hbox {}}
+  \def\@evenfoot{}
+  \def\sectionmark##1{}
+  \def\subsectionmark##1{}}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% MISCELLANEOUS
+%=============================================================================
+%\def\mybox{\fbox{\hbox to 429bp {\vbox to 630bp {\null}}}}
+ 
+%\def\pagebox{ \setlength{\unitlength}{1.0bp}
+%             \begin{picture}(0,0)(36,558) \put(0,0){\mybox} \end{picture}
+%              \begin{picture}(0,0)(18,523.25) \put(0,0){\mybox} \end{picture}
+%              \begin{picture}(0,0)(18,500.5) \put(0,0){\mybox} \end{picture}
+%           }
+
+
+\def\draftmargins{
+  \if@msmargin % Draw box for 1.25" left margins
+      \special{!userdict begin /eop-hook{ 
+            gsave 0.5 setlinewidth newpath
+            90 72 moveto 540 72 lineto 540 720 lineto 90 720 lineto
+            90 72 lineto
+            stroke grestore 
+%	     Cross at 0.5" down and 1" from right edge
+%           gsave 0.5 setlinewidth newpath
+%           522 756 moveto 558 756 lineto 
+%           540 738 moveto 540 774 lineto
+            stroke grestore 
+           }def end
+   }
+  \else % Draw box for 1" margins
+      \special{!userdict begin /eop-hook{ 
+            gsave 0.5 setlinewidth newpath
+            72 72 moveto 540 72 lineto 540 720 lineto 72 720 lineto
+            72 72 lineto
+            stroke grestore 
+%	     Cross at 0.5" down and 1" from right edge
+%           gsave 0.5 setlinewidth newpath
+%           522 756 moveto 558 756 lineto 
+%           540 738 moveto 540 774 lineto
+            stroke grestore 
+           }def end
+   }
+
+  \fi
+}
+
+\def\draftscreen{
+   \special{!userdict begin /bop-hook{gsave 
+            260 185 translate
+            65 rotate /Times-Roman findfont 144 scalefont setfont
+            0 0 moveto 0.9 setgray (DRAFT) show grestore 
+            }def end
+   }
+}
+
+
+
+%============================================================================
+% VERBATIMFILE
+%============================================================================
+% \verbatimfile{<filename>}    for verbatim inclusion of a file
+% - Note that the precise layout of line breaks in this file is important!
+% - added the \singlespace - EB
+%============================================================================
+\def\verbatimfile#1{\begingroup \singlespace
+                    \@verbatim \frenchspacing \@vobeyspaces 
+                    \input#1 \endgroup
+}
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+% SEPARATOR Pages
+%   Creates a blank page with a text centered horizontally and vertically.
+%   The page is neither counted nor numbered.
+%   These pages are required in the thesis format before sections such
+%   as appendices, vita, bibliography, etc. 
+%=============================================================================
+\def\separatorpage#1{
+  \newpage
+  \thispagestyle{empty}
+  \addtocounter{page}{-1}
+  \null
+  \vfil\vfil
+  \begin{center}
+    {\bface #1} 
+  \end{center}
+  \vfil\vfil
+  \newpage}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% \@chapapp is initially defined to be 'Chapter'.  The \appendix
+% command redefines it to be 'Appendix'.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\@chapapp{CHAPTER}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% APPENDIX
+%=============================================================================
+% The \appendix command must do the following:
+%    -- reset the chapter counter to zero
+%    -- set \@chapapp to Appendix (for messages)
+%    -- redefine the chapter counter to produce appendix numbers
+%    -- reset the section counter to zero
+%    -- redefine the \chapter command if appendix titles and headings are
+%       to look different from chapter titles and headings.
+%    -- produce special toc, lot and lof entries
+%=============================================================================
+\def\appendix{
+  \@appendix{Appendix}
+  \def\@chapstyle{appendix}
+  \def\@chapnumber{APPENDIX}
+  \let\@chapterhead\@appendixchapterhead
+  \let\@schapterhead\@appendixchapterhead}
+\def\endappendix{
+  \def\@chaptername##1{\uppercase {##1}}
+  \def\@chapstyle{chapter}
+  \def\@chapnumber{\thechapter.}
+  \let\@chapterhead\@makechapterhead
+  \let\@schapterhead\@makeschapterhead}
+
+\def\l@appendix#1#2{\pagebreak[3]
+  \vskip\@tocchapterskip % space above chapter line
+  \@dottedtocline{0}{0pt}{7.3em}{{\bface #1}}{#2}}
+
+\def\appendices{
+  \addtocontents{toc}{
+    \protect\addvspace{\@tocchapterskip}
+    \hbox to \hsize{\bface APPENDICES \hfil}
+    \protect\addvspace{\@tocchapterskip}}
+  \@appendix{Appendices}
+  \def\@chaptername##1{##1}
+  \def\@chapstyle{appendices}
+  \def\@chapnumber{Appendix\ \thechapter:}
+  \let\@chapterhead\@appendiceschapterhead
+  \let\@schapterhead\@appendiceschapterhead
+  \if@bibpresent\relax\else\separatorpage{DISCARD THIS PAGE}\fi % This
+                     % is a dirty fix.  For some reason, the TOC isn't
+		     % properly written unless the simple chapter with
+		     % sections is written.  The bibliography fixes this
+		     % problem when its present.  If its not, then the
+		     % seperator page is inserted to fix things.  EB
+} 
+
+\let\endappendices\endappendix
+
+\def\l@appendices#1#2{\@dottedtocline{0}{1.5em}{6.5em}{#1}{#2}}
+
+\def\noappendixtables{\def\@lotheading{}}
+\def\noappendixfigures{\def\@lofheading{}}
+\def\@lotheading{
+  \addtocontents{lot}{
+    \protect\stepcounter{listofheading} 
+    \protect\addvspace{\@tocchapterskip}
+    \hbox to \hsize{Appendix \hfil}
+    \hbox to \hsize{Table \hfil}}}
+\def\@lofheading{
+  \addtocontents{lof}{
+    \protect\stepcounter{listofheading}
+    \protect\addvspace{\@tocchapterskip}
+    \hbox to \hsize{Appendix \hfil}
+    \hbox to \hsize{Figure \hfil}}}
+
+\def\@appendix#1{\par
+  \addtocontents{toc}{{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{0}}}
+  \setcounter{chapter}{0}
+  \setcounter{section}{0}
+  \def\@chapapp{APPENDIX}
+  \def\thechapter{\Alph{chapter}}
+  \@lotheading
+  \@lofheading
+  %\separatorpage{\uppercase{#1}} % UW doesn't require a seperator page - EB
+} 
+
+%=============================================================================
+% COPYRIGHTPAGE
+%=============================================================================
+% The copyright must do the following:
+% - start a new page with no number
+% - place the copyright text centered at the bottom.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\copyrightpage{
+  \newpage
+  \thispagestyle{empty}    % No page number
+  \addtocounter{page}{-1}
+  \chapter*{}            % Required for \vfill to work
+  \begin{center}
+   \vfill
+   \copyright\ Copyright by \@author\ \@date\\
+   All Rights Reserved
+  \end{center}}
+
+
+%=============================================================================
+% GLOSSARY
+%=============================================================================
+% The glossary environment must do the following:
+% - produce the table of contents entry for the glossary
+% - start a new page with GLOSSARY centered two inches from the top
+%=============================================================================
+\def\glossary{
+  \chapter*{GLOSSARY}
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{GLOSSARY}}
+\def\endglossary{\par\newpage}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% NOMENCLATURE
+%=============================================================================
+% The nomenclature environment must do the following:
+% - produce the table of contents entry for the nomenclature section
+% - start a new page with NOMENCLATURE centered two inches from the top
+%=============================================================================
+\def\nomenclature{\separatorpage{DISCARD THIS PAGE}
+  \chapter*{NOMENCLATURE}
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{NOMENCLATURE}}
+\def\endnomenclature{\par\newpage}
+

+%=============================================================================

+% LIST OF SYMBOLS

+%=============================================================================

+% The list of symbols environment must do the following:

+% - produce the table of contents entry for the list of symbols section

+% - start a new page with LIST OF SYMBOLS centered two inches from the top

+%=============================================================================

+\def\listofsymbols{\separatorpage{DISCARD THIS PAGE}

+  \chapter*{LIST OF SYMBOLS}

+  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{LIST OF SYMBOLS}}

+\def\endlistofsymbols{\par\newpage}

+
+%=============================================================================
+% VITA
+%=============================================================================
+% The vita environment must do the following:
+% - produce a separator page with the word vita centered
+% - produce the table of contents entry for the vita
+% - start a new page with VITA centered two inches from the top
+%=============================================================================
+\def\vita{
+%  \separatorpage{VITA}			% UW doesn't require this EB
+  \chapter*{VITA}
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{VITA}}
+\def\endvita{\par\newpage}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
+%=============================================================================
+% The acknowledgments environment must do the following:
+% - start a new page with ACKNOWLEDGMENTS centered two inches from the top
+%=============================================================================
+\def\acknowledgments{
+  \chapter*{ACKNOWLEDGMENTS}
+  \doublespace}
+\def\endacknowledgments{\par\newpage}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% DEDICATION
+%=============================================================================
+% The dedication environment must do the following:
+% - start a new page
+% - center the text vertically
+% - include the text in a center environment
+%=============================================================================
+\def\dedication{
+  \newpage
+  \null\vfil
+  \begin{center}}
+\def\enddedication{\end{center}\par\vfil\newpage}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% DATE
+%=============================================================================
+%\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
+  %January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+  %July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+  %\space\number\day, \number\year}
+\newcount\@testday
+\def\today{\@testday=\day
+  \ifnum\@testday>30 \advance\@testday by -30
+  \else\ifnum\@testday>20 \advance\@testday by -20
+  \fi\fi
+  \number\day\ \
+  \ifcase\month\or
+    January \or February \or March \or April \or May \or June \or
+    July \or August \or September \or October \or November \or December
+    \fi\ \number\year
+}
+
+
+%  Single counter for theorems and theorem-like environments:
+\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[chapter]
+\newtheorem{assertion}[theorem]{Assertion}
+\newtheorem{claim}[theorem]{Claim}
+\newtheorem{conjecture}[theorem]{Conjecture}
+\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary}
+\newtheorem{definition}[theorem]{Definition}
+\newtheorem{example}[theorem]{Example}
+\newtheorem{figger}[theorem]{Figure}
+\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma}
+\newtheorem{prop}[theorem]{Proposition}
+\newtheorem{remark}[theorem]{Remark}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% EQUATION and EQNARRAY -- put here because it must follow \chapter definition
+%
+% \newcounter{equation}    
+%=============================================================================
+% \jot = 3pt      % Extra space added between lines of an eqnarray environment
+\@addtoreset{equation}{chapter}   % Makes \chapter reset 'equation' counter.
+\def\theequation{{\rm \thechapter}.\arabic{equation}}
+
+%=============================================================================
+% The macro \@eqnnum defines how equation numbers are to appear in equations.
+%=============================================================================
+\def\@eqnnum{[\theequation]} 
+
+%=============================================================================
+% INITIALIZATION   -  Default initializations
+%=============================================================================
+\ps@thesis                  % 'plain' page style
+\pagenumbering{arabic}      % Arabic page numbers
+\onecolumn                  % Single-column.
+\raggedbottom               % Ragged bottom
+%\if@twoside\else\raggedbottom\fi % Ragged bottom unless twoside option.
+
+\global\newif\if@bibpresent   % Flag for the appendicies fix.  If bib present
+                              % then the seperator page isn't needed...
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Define \bface to be \bf so that all default boldface text can be 
+% disabled by redefining \bface to be \null.  -dfk
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+\newcommand{\bface}{\bf}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The following penalties are for conforming with Purdue's
+% requirements for the thesis format. 
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+\brokenpenalty=10000
+\clubpenalty=10000
+\widowpenalty=10000
+
+%=============================================================================
+% END FILE
+%=============================================================================